JP6717368B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a special symbol hit lottery is performed, and a game machine that performs a normal symbol hit lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate is there. In such a gaming machine, a determination value for performing a special lottery lottery is obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and a normal lottery lottery is performed based on the game ball passing through the through gate. There is one that acquires a judgment value for.

JP 2012-010910 A

However, in such a gaming machine, the control process may be complicated.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable control processing.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention updates the first determination value with a value within the first range and generates the first determination value, and the second determination value with a value within the second range. Second generation means for generating, a control means capable of repeatedly executing a game control process, and an interrupt means capable of interrupting the game control process and executing an interrupt process based on a predetermined trigger. If, have a, the interrupt section, based on the first condition is satisfied, the way of processing of the interrupt processing, and more each of the first decision and the said first generating means second generation means First acquisition means for acquiring a value and the second determination value, and first control when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition means is the specific first determination value The first control means for executing the first and the second condition different from the first condition are satisfied, and the first processing is executed as one of the interrupt processing executed after the first acquisition means. A second acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value that are newly updated by the generation unit and the second generation unit, and the second determination that is acquired by the second acquisition unit. A second control unit that executes a second control different from the first control when it is determined that the value is the specific second determination value, and the second control unit acquires the first control unit . After the first determination value is stored in the storage unit, a process of deleting the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is performed, and the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. After being stored in the storage means, a process of deleting the first determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is performed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first generation means for updating and generating the first judgment value with the value within the first range, and the first generation means for updating and generating the second judgment value with the value within the second range. 2 generation means, control means capable of repeatedly executing game control processing, and interrupt means capable of executing interrupt processing by interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined trigger. The interrupt means, based on the satisfaction of the first condition, includes the first determination value and the second determination value, respectively, as one of the interrupt processings by the first generation means and the second generation means. A first acquisition unit that acquires a determination value, and a first control that executes the first control when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is the specific first determination value Based on the control means and the fact that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the first generating means and the first generating means are provided as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquiring means. Second acquisition means that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value that are newly updated by two generation means, respectively, and the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is the specific A second control unit that executes a second control different from the first control when it is determined to be the second determination value, and the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is stored. After being stored in the means, a process of deleting the second determination value obtained by the first obtaining means is performed, and the second determination value obtained by the second obtaining means is stored in the storage means. After that, the process of erasing the first determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is performed.

Therefore , there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) shows the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the big hit determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol, (c) shows typically the correspondence of the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the notice production table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the big hit notice production selection table typically, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notice production selection table for detachment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining back C. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production selection processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice reselection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production command processing which is executed by the MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. 7 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main reselection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows weight progress production processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production counter initial value table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows notice production selection processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the re-acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning process performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 4th embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed the structure of the super reach selection table in 5th Embodiment typically. It is a figure, (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the jackpot super reach selection table in a 5th embodiment, and (d) is a detachment super reach selection table in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the pseudo fluctuation supplement production selection table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the jackpot supplement production production table in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 7, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment complementary effect selection table in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation reselection process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the "town stage" → "empty stage" is changed. ”→“Island stage”→“City center stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like affixed to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in an approximately box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a belt-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined or more momentum hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball passes through a through gate (also called the second entrance) 67. In this case, a lottery for normal symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and thus a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and as a value added after the jackpot is over after the special game state ends, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to make it win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the ordinary symbol which is performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. It

As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and then the added value after the big hit ends is given. More specifically, in the "big hit A", as a value added after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol from the end of the big hit to the next big hit (during a change in the special symbol). Along with the shift to, it will shift to the time saving state of the normal design. On the other hand, in the "big hit B", as a value added after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal time saving state after the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called special variation state of the special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state (16R jackpot). ) Is the state of the game that is easy to move to. On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the normal symbol) refers to a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", and this is the normal state where the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the state where the winning probability is lower than during medium working hours. Indicates.

In the present embodiment, if the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state (that is, after the end of the “big jackpot A”), the probability variation state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot. However, the number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given, and after the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times May be configured to be set to a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, the number of times the special symbol is in the probability changing state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily set. Similarly, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery is configured to be in a time saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the "big hit B" is finished, but the time saving period of the normal symbol is 100 times. It is not limited and may be arbitrarily set.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a change by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by combining the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 12.1-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state according to the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns imitating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 at the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the displayed number of the reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is being performed, or after the variation ends. As a stop symbol, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps on the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls of 4 times as in the case of the first ball entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or 5 times or more (for example, (8 times). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for the predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open/close plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while opening the opening 65a. It may be formed.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out opening 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and firing controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting/receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And the fluctuation pattern table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1 described later is stored. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol, only "0" is defined, and as the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol, 10 of "0 to 9" The judgment value is specified. If the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A), the special symbol It is determined to be a jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 8(b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is defined in association with each other. Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 63". Further, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “64 to 127”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 8(c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 20" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 8(c)). Further, in a high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5 to 212" is defined (see FIG. 8(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the sphere passing through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is hit. It is determined whether or not there is.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9A to 9D) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 27). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance opening. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 255) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 255 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 255). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 255, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (FIG. 8A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1. However, when it coincides with the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability that the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than that at a low probability (special It is divided into two types, one for a period of time when the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 127). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 127 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 127), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 255. In this first per random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is in the first per random number table for low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 8A). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 256, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/256”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first random number table for high probability ( FIG. 8A). In this way, at the time of high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 256, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "10/256".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 128. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 63" is "big hit A". When the value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 127, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (for example, 125 to 127) and "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 116 to 124) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the same reach is generated. Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 115) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each out-of-stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a big hit is likely to occur, so that a range of random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as wide as "0 to 115" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, and it becomes easy to select “Completely out”. In this table, the "front-rear outreach" is narrowed to 125 to 127, and the "reach other than front-rear outreach" is also narrowed to 116 to 124, making it difficult to select "rear-rear outreach" or "reach other than front-rear-reach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as narrow as 0 to 101 Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 102 to 124, and it is easy to select "reach other than out-of-front-rear". Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front/rear reach” is set to 125 to 127.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 256, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256), returns to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 27) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 9A) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 9B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 9C). And the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 9D) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of “0 to 63” is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of “64 to 223” is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “224 to 255”. MPU201 of the main control device 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is off in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 101", complete outlier is set, and if it is in the range of "102 to 127", outreach is set. Set (reach out of front/rear, reach other than out of front/rear).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-127" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds) and "128-255" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, with respect to the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 191”, and various super-reach various out of the range of “192 to 254”. (60 seconds), "255" is set to various special reach types (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the game state is the probability variation game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 115” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "116-127" in the range, the out-reach (rear out-of-front-reach, reach other than out-of-rear) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is lower than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal gaming state is set low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase of the period until the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is lengthened during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot and the player feels bored.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 255, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 255). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through either the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203. It is stored in the normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203b.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second winning random number table, it is determined as the winning of the normal symbol. Also, this second per random number table is for low probability of normal symbols (period when the normal state of normal symbols) and high probability when the probability of hitting normal symbols is higher than that of low probability (normal symbols) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be the winning, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8C, at the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 20”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 256, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 16. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/16".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 212". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 256, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 208, so the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol "○" is lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the first entrance 64 is "1 second x 2 times". "Opened. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 255), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 27).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various flags and counters. Here, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 7(b), a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a probability change It has at least a flag 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a big hit flag 203g, a counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/prohibiting, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information, the special symbol 1 of the RAM 233 or The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the starting winning is started. .. Thereby, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning can be accurately predicted.

Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is available in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning) This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 20).

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 20, see S405 of FIG. 22). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and holds the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding spheres (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S604 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 23).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S603 of FIG. 24: No). ).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol. If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The probability variation flag 203e has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the end timing of the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (S1015 in FIG. 28). reference). Then, in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the game state is referred to for determining whether or not the probability variation state (see S302 in FIG. 21), and is turned off when the next jackpot game is started. It is set (see S214 in FIG. 20).

Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 21, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if that value is ON, based on the first random number table 202a for high probability, special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state. When the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol. The time saving medium counter 203f is set to 100 at the end of the big hit B (16R time shortening big hit) (see S1014 in FIG. 28). Then, it is normally referred to in the symbol variation process to determine whether or not it is in time saving (see S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 23), and in the special symbol variation process, 1 is subtracted each time the variation time elapses. (See S217 of FIG. 20). In the normal symbol variation process, even when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, when the above-described probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be in the hour/short state of the ordinary symbol (S508 in FIG. 23). , S514, S519). As a result, after the jackpot A is finished, the probability that the special symbol is changed to the next jackpot can be maintained, and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol can be maintained, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, the game can be played with the goal of becoming the big hit A as one goal, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The big hit flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203g is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not. The big hit flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of special symbols, and is set to ON when the big hit (special game state) is started (see S1003 in FIG. 28). Further, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1016 in FIG. 28). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), this jackpot flag 203g is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (see S201 in FIG. 20).

The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second per random number counter C4). , A storage area for storing the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 201. The stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the device and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area) that stores the values of various flags and counters, I/O, etc. Have

The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 26). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via the input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the random number generation IC for production 800, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

Next, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. At least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and a notice effect selection table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine the details of variation. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

The notice production selection table 222b2 is a table for selecting a form of notice production executed during variable display. Here, the notice effect in the present embodiment specifically indicates the degree of expectation according to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The effect for doing is shown. As the character, one of the three types may be selected. Specifically, a boy character (see Ds2 in FIG. 4), an old character (not shown), and a girl character (not shown) are selected.

The boy character has a higher selection rate when the special symbol lottery is missed than the other characters, while the selection rate when the jackpot is low is lower than that of the other characters. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the degree of expectation of a big hit is low as compared with the case where another character is displayed in the small area Ds2 during variable display.

On the other hand, in the case of the girl character, the proportion selected when the special symbol lottery is off is lower than other characters, while the proportion selected in the case of a big hit is lower than that of other characters. Get higher Therefore, by displaying the character of the girl in the small area Ds2 during the variable display, it is possible to expect the player to win the jackpot.

In addition, the elderly character is configured to have a higher selection rate than the girl character and a lower selection rate than the boy character when the character is out. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the selection rate is higher than that of a boy character, and the selection rate is lower than that of a girl character. As a result, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot as compared with the case where the boy character is displayed. In this way, by changing the type of the notice effect (displayed character) depending on whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, it is possible to predict the expectation degree of the big hit from the notice effect. That is, since the lottery result of the special symbol can be predicted from the contents of the notice effect before the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player's game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the variable display. Can be (suppressed). The type of notice effect is not limited to the type of character displayed in the small area Ds2, and may be arbitrarily set. For example, the notice effect for changing the back image may be executed, or the notice effect for changing the mode (for example, the size or the color) of the changing third symbol may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 11, the notice production selection table 222b defines at least a jackpot notice production selection table 222b1 and a detachment notice production selection table 222b2. The big hit notice production table 222b1 is a data table for selecting the form of the notice production to be executed in the variable display executed when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the notice notice production selection table 222b2 for disengagement is a special symbol. It is a data table for selecting the mode of the notice effect to be executed in the variable effect executed when the lottery is missed.

First, referring to FIG. 11B, the jackpot preliminary announcement effect selection table 222b1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11( b ), the jackpot preliminary announcement effect table 222b1 defines the manner of the preliminary announcement effect to be executed for each value of the random number for effect. Although the details will be described later, the random number for effect is a random number generated by the random number generating IC for effect IC 800 electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the production random number generation IC 800 can generate a random 8-bit numerical value (0 to 255) as the production random number.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the notice effect A is associated with the range of the random number for effect "0 to 24". The notice effect A is a notice effect in which the boy character is displayed in the small area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B). As described above, in the case of the variable display for the jackpot, the boy character is selected. Since the proportion of winning is low, by selecting the notice effect A in the jackpot variation, it is possible to give an unexpected feeling that the jackpot has been achieved despite the notice effect having a low expectation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The notice effect B is associated with the range of the random number for effect "25 to 99". The notice effect B is a notice effect in which an old man's character is displayed, and as described above, the proportion selected in the case of a variable display for the jackpot is configured to be higher than that of the notice effect A. Therefore, when the notice production B is displayed, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot. Further, the notice effect C is associated with the range of the random number for effect "100 to 249". This notice effect C is a notice effect of a mode in which a girl character is displayed, and is a type of notice effect having the highest selection rate in the case of a big hit. Therefore, by displaying the notice production C, it is possible to make the player have a stronger sense of expectation for the jackpot.

On the other hand, "reselection" is associated with the range of the effect random number value of "250 to 255". The "reselection" means re-selection of the notice effect. That is, when the value of the random number for effect is in the range of “250 to 255”, the type of the notice effect is not determined and the random number for effect is again acquired from the random number generating IC for effect IC 800 (reproduce the effect random number. get). Then, the re-obtained effect random number and the big hit advance notice effect selection table 222b1 are referred to. This “reselection” is repeatedly executed until the value of the random number for effect reaches a value (0 to 249) corresponding to any of the notice effect types. That is, when the value of the random number for effect acquired from the random number generation IC for effect 800 is "250 to 255", the "reselection" is repeatedly executed.

By associating reselection with the range of “250 to 255”, the notice effect is determined only when the number of 250 random numbers for effects of “0 to 249” is reached. For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when one of the 25 values of "0 to 24" out of the 250 values of "0 to 249" is selected, and the probability thereof is 10% (25/ 250). Further, the notice effect B is selected when it reaches any of the 75 values of "25 to 99" out of the 250 values of "0 to 249", so the probability is 30% (75 /250). Further, the notice effect C is selected when one of the 150 values of “100 to 249” out of the 250 values of “0 to 249” is selected, and therefore the probability thereof is 60% (150 /250).

As described above, in the present embodiment, of the 8-bit (256 ways) values that can be generated by the production random number generation IC 800, 250 values are used for the selection of the notice production. That is, it is possible to use a number of decimal numbers (that is, 250) in decimal notation for determining the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that each notice effect is selected to a value with a good delimitation (10%, 30%, 60%) (convert the probability percentage (percentage) into an integer). This allows the player to more easily understand the probability that each notice effect will be selected. In addition, the developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, the dismissal notice effect selection table 222b2 will be described. The detachment notice effect selection table 222b2 is a data table in which the manner of the notice effect to be executed is defined for each value of the random number for effect like the hit notice effect selection table 222b1 for hit.

As shown in FIG. 11C, the notice randomness A is associated with the range of the random number for effect "0 to 149", and the range of the random number for effect is "150 to 224". The notice effect B is associated, and the notice effect C is associated with the range of “225 to 249”. Further, "reselection" is associated with the range of the effect random number value of "250 to 255", as in the jackpot preliminary announcement effect selection table 222b1.

For this reason, the notice effect A is selected when one of 150 values of "0 to 149" out of 250 values of "0 to 249" is selected, and thus the probability of selection is 60% ( 150/250). Further, the notice effect B is selected when it reaches any of the 75 values of "150 to 224" out of the 250 values of "0 to 249", so the probability is 30% (75 /250). Further, the notice effect C is selected when one of the 25 values of "225 to 249" out of the 250 values of "0 to 249" is selected, so the probability is 10% (25 /250). Therefore, in the case of deviation, the notice effect A is most easily selected as the type of notice effect, and the notice effect C is most difficult to be selected. By providing a difference in the probabilities of selection, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not to be a big hit based on the type of notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous while the variable display is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in accordance with the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, another production image is added to the production image (for example, the variation production image) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. When displaying (for example, a notice effect image), the notice effect selection table 222b for selecting the type of the notice effect additionally displayed is configured. By defining the notice production selection table 222b separately from the variation pattern selection table 222a, it is possible to easily select the notice production additionally displayed with respect to the variation production. If the variation pattern selection table 222a defines the variation effect mode including the type of the notice effect, the amount of data in the variation pattern selection table 222a increases. For example, if there are 32 types of variation effects and there are 3 types of notice effects that can be additionally displayed for each, there are 96 types (32×3) of variation effects for the variation pattern selection table 222a. The type must be specified. On the other hand, if the variation pattern table 222a and the notice effect selection table 222b are separately prepared as in the present embodiment, if 35 (32+3) types of change effect and notice effect are provided. Since it is good, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be prevented (suppressed) from increasing.

In this embodiment, an IC that generates any of 8-bit (256 ways) values is adopted as the random number for production IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a 10-bit (1024 ways) value may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, 1000 values are used for selecting the notice effect, and when 24 values different from the 1000 values are acquired, the re-lottery is performed. Good. Then, the number of random number values (judgment values) may be associated with each effect with 10 being the minimum unit. With such a configuration, since the percentage can be made an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy. Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 7 bits) may be adopted. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for selecting the notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be made an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an advance notice reselection flag 223e, and an advance notice reselection counter. 223f, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the various kinds of information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, the main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the holding number of balls is managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. Has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The number is stored in the symbol reservation ball number counter 223b (see S1308 in FIG. 31). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number for the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding sphere counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1302 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1402 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is used so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1305 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1408 of FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The advance notice reselection flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not "reselection" is determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b. If this advance notice reselection flag 223e is ON, it means that "reselection" has been determined (the advance notice effect has not been determined) from the advance notice effect selection table 222b, and if it is OFF, "reselection" is performed. It means that it has not been decided (the notice effect has been decided). An initial value of the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to OFF, and "reselect" is determined from the advance notice effect selection table 222b in the advance notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) for selecting the type of advance notice effect. If it is turned on, it is turned on (see S1506 in FIG. 33). Also, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34 ), it is set to OFF when any of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) is determined or when “reselection” is determined 10 times or more in succession. (See S1613 in FIG. 34). By referring to the notice reselection flag 223e, when "reselect" is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the notice effect reselection (re-lottery) in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). Can be executed.

The advance notice reselection counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of times the process of reselecting the type of advance notice effect (re-lottery) is continued. Here, the process of re-lottery of the notice effect is to obtain a new random number value (determination value) from the effect random number generation IC 800 based on the fact that “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b. This is a process for reselecting the type of notice production again, and is executed in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34). In the present embodiment, when the process of re-lottery of the type of notice effect is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, the process of re-lottery is terminated and the normal notice effect (notice effect A to C) It is configured to execute a different specific notice effect (special notice effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the re-lottery from being continuously selected and the type of the notice effect not being determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display one of the notice effects at the display timing of the notice effect.

The advance notice reselection counter 223f has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by 1 each time the advance notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) is performed to re-select the type of advance notice effect (see FIG. 34). S1607). Further, in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34 ), one of the notice effects (notice effects A to C) is determined, or “reselection” is determined 10 times or more in succession, and a particular notice effect ( When the jackpot confirmation notice effect and the jackpot expectation degree notice effect) are set, they are initialized to 0 (see S1612 in FIG. 34).

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S1216 in FIG. 30). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process (FIG. 29) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1108: Yes in FIG. 29), the power-off flag 223y is set to on for a certain period of time. This is the case when the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before (100 milliseconds) has passed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only some of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1109 in FIG. 29). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, an elapsed timer for measuring the effect time, and the like. doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed. In addition, the clock timer counts the elapsed time from the start of the effect such as the variation effect. Based on the elapsed time counted by the clock timer, various controls (setting of operations of various types of properties, development of effects, etc.) are performed.

Next, details of the effect random number generation IC 800 electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The production random number generation IC 800 is an IC for generating a determination value (random number value) used for a predetermined determination (determination of the type of the notice production to be displayed) executed in the voice lamp control device 113. Since this random number generation IC for production IC800 can randomly generate a value in the range of 8 bits (0 to 255) every time, the determination result can also be random. Therefore, the displayed notice effect can be randomly determined, and thus the displayed notice effect can be difficult to predict. Therefore, a surprising game can be provided.

The rendering random number generation IC 800 stores a random number generation unit for generating a random value (random number value) within a range of 8 bits (0 to 255) and a random number value generated by the random number generation unit. And a random number storage unit for storing the random number. The random number generation unit includes a random pulse generation circuit (RPG) that generates a pulse signal at random time intervals, and measures the time interval of the pulse signal generated by the RPG to obtain 8 bits (1 byte). To a random number storage unit and store it in the random number storage unit. The random number generation circuit has a specification capable of generating a random number value of 200 megabytes per second (two random number values per 10 μs). That is, the random number value can be updated at a time interval shorter than the time interval at which the process for determining the notice effect is executed. More specifically, when the “reselection” is determined from the notice effect selection table 222b, the voice lamp control device 113 produces an effect in the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 30). A new random number value is acquired from the for-use random number generation IC 800 and re-lottery for the notice effect is performed. This re-lottery of the notice effect continues to be executed at 1 millisecond intervals as long as “reselect” is selected from the notice effect selection table 222b, and during this period, one random value is acquired every 1 millisecond. On the other hand, since the random number generation unit has a specification capable of generating two random number values per 10 μs, even if “reselect” is continuously selected, a new random number value is used every time the re-lottery of the notice effect is performed. It is possible to execute a lottery (reselection). Therefore, the displayed notice effect can be randomly determined, and thus the displayed notice effect can be difficult to predict. Therefore, a surprising game can be provided.

The random number storage unit is a FIFO (First In First Out) type storage device that stores a random number value generated by a random number generation circuit with a predetermined number (for example, 16) as an upper limit. The voice lamp control device 113 can read the random number value stored in the random number storage unit and use it for determining the type of the notice effect. As described above, since the random number storage unit is a FIFO type storage device, when the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the random number value to be read out, the random number value stored at the earliest time is stored in the voice lamp. Output to the control device 113. Then, the read (output) random number value is discarded from the random number storage unit. With this, each time the voice lamp control device 113 is instructed to read the random number value, the random number value generated at different timings can be output from the random number storage unit. Therefore, the random number value should be a more random value. You can

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, a variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation). (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, high-speed reading of the data of the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time to read out the data. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM like the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, in the NAND flash memory 234a, due to its nature, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data can be corrected based on the erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a to move. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In the remaining boot programs, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) executed after the boot process (see S1701 in FIG. 35) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, and thus the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image of the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. , The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed, and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are completed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entrance into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect in the case of being performed.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1703 and S1704 in FIG. 35).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 shows that the display control device 114 is powered on immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 while being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(c). At the same position as the design, the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" design is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in Fig. 13(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in Fig. 13(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area A power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 14B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “urban stage” and a back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”. Further, FIG. 15 shows the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 14, the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images of the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. After being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, when the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled and displayed due to the connection.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “town stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding rear-side image to start from the position a to the position a′ in the initial position of the display area. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow in the left direction.

On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface C is, as shown in FIG. 15, with the passage of time, in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface C is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player's operation of the frame button 22, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black over time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 15A is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, since the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed, all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the town stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, it is possible to reduce the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 and reduce the load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has only a partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b, the resident video RAM 235. The image is stored in the back image area 235c. Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15(a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) excluding FIG. 15(b) is after power-on. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data for all the back images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may increase the cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range of FIG. 13A to FIG. 13B). ), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, if the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c, the initial position of the back B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while doing. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

After the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while the operation is being performed. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the rear surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15(b) to 15(c) and FIGS. 15(c) to 15(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. This allows the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and 15C to 15A to be normally used while the images of FIGS. 15A to 15B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after the images of FIGS. 15A and 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. By using the image data corresponding to the back surface image thus displayed, the images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C are stored in the rear image dedicated sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back-side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back-side image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back-side image can be displayed reliably.

On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are the images corresponding to the image between position b′ and position b. Duplicate data is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without numbers from "0" to "9", the main symbols consisting of the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data stored in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. In addition, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, the error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is displayed after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame worth The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a performance timing storage area. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a back image change flag 233w, a back image determination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the out is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols showing each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for one variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating the magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, one frame image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in that image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is specified as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the back surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol changes at high speed for a predetermined time period when the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that period, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

“Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents cannot be predicted because the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the configuration that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) which should start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponds to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that point is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. The simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1705 in FIG. 35). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 47B).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2001 in FIG. 37B), and If the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2008 of FIG. 37(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 37B) are displayed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 37(b) S2009) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 47A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for is written is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 18) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be always stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (see FIG. 37(b )), the pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated as described above, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,. For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 37(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 of FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The effect timing storage area 233i displays the timing (value of the pointer 233f) for displaying the notice effect (the notice effect A to C, the jackpot confirmed notice effect, the jackpot expectation large notice effect) and the special notice effect for each variation pattern type. This is an area for storing the timing (value of the pointer 233f) to be activated. In the present embodiment, when the notice effect or the special notice effect is set, the notice effect or the special notice effect is displayed at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i.

Here, a method for setting the notice effect in the display control device 114 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the notice effect data table that defines the display content for each type of notice effect for each frame is stored in the data table storage area 233b separately from the variable display data table and the like. When the display advance notice effect command for notifying the type of advance notice effect is notified from the voice lamp control device 113, the advance notice effect data table corresponding to the notified command and the display data table buffer 233d at that time are displayed. The variable display data table that has been set for this is combined. When synthesizing, the display content defined in the notice production data table is displayed for each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice production defined in the production timing storage area 233i. to add. That is, in the notice production data table, the display content after the start timing of the notice production is defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where the addresses for all the varying times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 49).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S2006 in FIG. 37B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame worth The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the back image is not changed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S2801 in FIG. 43A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3509 in FIG. 48), and is set to OFF when the rear image change process is executed (see S3510 in FIG. 48). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In the back image discrimination flag 233x, when the back image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to ON (S2802 in FIG. 43). reference). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S3021 in FIG. 44), and other than the demo display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39(a), S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41(a), and FIG. 41(b). ) S2605 and S2705 in FIG. 42). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 44) (S3014 in FIG. 44), and the confirmation display flag other than the confirmation display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S2206 in FIG. 39(a), S2405 in FIG. 40, S2505 in FIG. 41(a), and FIG. 41(b). ) S2605 and S2705 in FIG. 42). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, (256, 128, 128, 256) respectively, it is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, with the processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37, special symbol variation processing for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the process of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S211: Yes), jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF (S214), the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S215), and the process proceeds to S218. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S215, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set. To be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit effect is started.

In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, "special jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuating effect.

In the special symbol variation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

Next, referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of the probability change of the special symbol (that is, the probability change flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is the jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value "0" stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, “0”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the special symbol of two types is a big hit (big hit A. , Jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 63”, it is determined to be the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “64 to 127”, the big hit. It is determined to be B (16R hour short and big hit) (see FIG. 8B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 9A), and the fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ( Change time).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviating symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 115", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "116 to 127", release reach (other than front and rear reach, other than front and rear release) is set. Reach). On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability are compared to determine the stop type. Set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 101", complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "102 to 127", disconnection reach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed. Time).

When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 27). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing are set in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), the present processing is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64 are attached. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S501). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is made while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508). In the process of S508, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the hour/hour state.

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the big hit (S509). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

In the process of S509, if it is not a big hit of the special symbol (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 212", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,213 to 255", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 8C).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal diagram type time saving state is not set (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 20", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 21 to 255", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 8C).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S512), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S512: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514), and if it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S515, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S518). In the processing of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S522). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S522, if the variation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S522, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S523, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 27) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or the processing of S518, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S905) of the main processing (see FIG. 27) is executed next. Is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), determines whether or not the ball passes through the through-gate 67, and if the ball passes, the second win is performed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603). : No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S601: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S812 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S813, S814) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S813, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the information about the occurrence of power failure is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, if any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) ends, the first symbol display device End the variable display being executed in 37, in the display mode set by the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) or the process of S308, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display updating process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 23), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display that is normally, in the display mode set by the process of S513 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) or the process of S518, stop display of the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 25 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S901, as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 26) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), the big hit flag 203g is set to ON (S1003), and the present process is ended.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1004). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1004, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1004: No), this process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1005). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1005: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1006), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1007). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1005, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1008, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1008: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1009), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached.

In the processing of S1010, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1010, when it is determined that it is not the ending start timing (S1010: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (special game state) this time (S1012). In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1012: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined to be the end timing (S1012: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a jackpot A (S1013), and if it is a jackpot A (S1013: Yes), the probability change flag. 203e is set to ON (S1015), and the process proceeds to S1016. On the other hand, in the process of S1013, when it is determined that it is not the big hit A (that is, it is the big hit B) (S1013: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to 100 (S1014), and the process of S1016 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1016 executed after the processing of S1015 is completed, the jackpot flag 203g is set to OFF, and then this processing is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 34. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1217 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1214 in FIG. 30), the power-off process of S1217 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1217 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1102: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S1217 is performed. It is started after the execution of the processing is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

If the power-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Then, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1217 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108. ..

In the process of S1102, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1102: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off process of S1217, This is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1104, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S1104), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1105). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S1105, if the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data ( S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S1217 is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1217 is executed, the process of S1108 with the power-off flag 223y turned on is that the start-up process of this time is an instant. This is the case after the occurrence of a general power outage and in the state in which the execution of the power-off processing in S1217 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1108 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S1104 to S1106 is performed. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1111), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1109 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1104 when the processing of S1108 is reached through the processing of S1104 to S1108. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1201 was executed (S1201), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1201: No), the process proceeds to S1212 without performing the processes of S1202 to S1211. In the process of S1201, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1202 to S1211, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1212 and the variable display setting process of S1213 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1212 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1213 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1203 to S1213 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1202). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1208 described later (S1203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1204). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S1205 without the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1206). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1207). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored is monitored, and it corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preliminary announcement character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1207 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1208), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1209). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1209, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1210). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output processing of S1209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1210 ends, the "reselection" is determined when the notice effect is determined, and thus the notice reselection process for acquiring a new random number value (determination value) and reselecting the notice effect is executed. (S1211), the process proceeds to S1212. The details of the advance notice reselection process (S1211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1212, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1212). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1213). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the process of S1213 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1214). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S1214, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1214: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S1216), and the power is turned on. A disconnection process is executed (S1217). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1218), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1215), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1215: No), the process returns to S1201 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1215: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination processing (S1212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1212). This command determination processing (S1212) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. ..

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1301). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1302), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1303). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1304). When the stop type command is received (S1304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1306), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1304: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1307). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S1307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. (The number N of times the variable display is held in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1308). Further, in the process of S1308, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1308 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize. Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1308. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of a start winning or special At the time of the lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1308 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is not received (S1307: No), it is then determined whether the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1309). When it is determined that the opening command is received (S1309: Yes), the opening command for display is set (S1310), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1309, when the opening command is not received (S1309: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1311). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1311: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1312), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set. Then (S1313), the present process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1311, if it is determined that the round number command is not received (S1311: No), then it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S1314). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1314: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S1315), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1314, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1316), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1213). This variable display setting process (S1213) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), it means that the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and thus the process of S1407. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1402), and then in the processing of S1303 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1403).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1404). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is used so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1405). In the process of S1405, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of: first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After the data is shifted, a notice effect selection process for selecting a notice effect mode to be displayed in addition to the variation pattern (variation display) is executed (S1406), and then the process proceeds to S1407. The details of the notice effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S1407, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1407). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1407: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1408), and then the process of S1306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). At, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1409). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1409, a display stop type command is set (S1410), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display stop type command, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol. To be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the notice effect selecting process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the notice effect selecting process (S1406). This advance notice effect selection process (S1406) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the advance notice effect displayed in addition to the variable display (variation pattern). Is a process for deciding the mode and notifying the display control device 114.

In the notice production setting process (S1406), first, a production random number value (judgment value) to be used for determining the notice production is acquired from the production random number generation IC 800 (S1501). The obtained effect random number value is temporarily stored in, for example, a buffer area (effect random number buffer) provided in the other memory area 223z. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a big hit (S1502), and when it is determined that it is not a big hit (S1502: No), the notice display selection table for disconnection 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) is set. Then, the notice effect is selected (determined) based on the effect random number value (effect counter value) stored in the effect random number buffer (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11C, when the value of the random number for effect (effect counter) is “0 to 149”, “notice effect A” is determined as the type of notice effect, If the value is "150 to 224", "notice effect B" is determined, and if the value is "225 to 249", "notice effect C" is determined. On the other hand, if the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined. As described above, when the “reselection” is determined, a new random number value is acquired from the random number generation IC for production 800 in the advance notice reselection processing (see FIG. 34) described later, and the advance notice type is re-selected. Determine (reselect).

As described above, in the present embodiment, among the 8-bit (256 ways) random number values for effect that can be generated by the random number generating IC for effect 800, 250 values are used for selecting the advance effect. That is, it is possible to use a number of decimal numbers (that is, 250) in decimal notation for determining the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that each notice effect is selected to a value with good delimitation (10%, 30%, 60%) (convert the probability percentage into an integer). This allows the player to more easily understand the probability that each notice effect will be selected. In addition, the developer who designs the probability of the notice effect can set the probability more easily.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1502: Yes), the big hit advance notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11(b)) and the effect stored in the effect random number buffer. The notice effect is selected (determined) based on the use random number value (effect counter value) (S1503), and then the process proceeds to S1505. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 11B, when the random number value for production (production counter value) is “0 to 24”, “preliminary production A” is set as the type of preliminary production. Is determined and the value is "25 to 99", the type of the notice effect is "notice effect B", and if the value is "100 to 249", the type is the notice effect " The notice production C” is determined. On the other hand, if the value is "250 to 255", "reselection" is determined.

In the process of S1505, it is determined whether or not the selection result of the notice effect is “reselection” (S1505). If the selection result is not “reselection” (S1505: No), the notice effect selected (decided) is determined. A notice display effect command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of is set (S1507), and this processing ends.

The display notice effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1202) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 sets the display of the notice effect indicated by this display notice effect command by receiving this display notice effect command. That is, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When synthesizing, the display content defined in the notice production data table is displayed for each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice production defined in the production timing storage area 233j. to add. That is, in the notice production data table, the display content after the start timing of the notice production is defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where the addresses for all the varying times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1505 that "reselection" has been determined (selected) (S1505: Yes), the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to ON (S1506), and this process ends. By setting the advance notice reselection flag 223e to ON, in the advance notice reselection processing (see FIG. 34) described later, it is possible to newly acquire a random number value for effect and determine the type of advance effect again.

Next, the advance notice reselection process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the advance notice reselection process (S1211). The advance notice reselection process (S1211) is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the notice reselection process (S1211), first, it is determined whether the notice reselection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). As described above, the advance notice reselection flag 223e is a flag that is set to ON when "reselection" is determined when determining the type of advance notice effect, and newly obtains a random number value for the advance notice. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is necessary to reselect the effect.

In the process of S1601, if it is determined that the notice reselection flag 223e is off (S1601: No), there is no need to perform the notice production reselection, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the notice reselection flag 223e is ON (S1601: Yes), it is necessary to reselect the notice effect (when determining the type of the notice effect last time, "Reselection" has been determined, and the type of notice production has not been determined). Therefore, in this case, the random number value for production is acquired from the random number generation IC for production 800 (S1602), and then the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (the variable display for setting the notice effect notifies the big hit). It is determined whether or not it is a variable display (S1603).

In the processing of S1603, when it is determined that the variable display does not indicate a big hit (S1603: No), the notice display selection table for disconnection 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and the random number value for production (value of the production counter). The notice effect is selected (determined) based on (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1606.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1603, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S1603: Yes), the big hit advance notice effect selection table 222b1 (see FIG. 11(b)) and a random number value for effect (effect). The type of the notice effect is selected based on (counter value) (S1604), and the process proceeds to S1606.

In the process of S1606, it is determined whether the selection result of the notice effect is reselection (S1606). If the selection result of the notice effect is not reselection (S1606: No), the notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S1614), and the process proceeds to S1612.

When "reselection" is determined when determining (selecting) the type of notice production (S1606: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the notice reselection counter 223f (S1607), and the reselection counter is then selected. It is determined whether the value of is 10 or more (S1608). In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is less than 10 (S1608: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1608, if the value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is 10 or more (S1608: Yes), the re-selection of the advance notice effect is terminated, and the specification different from the normal advance notice effect (previous notice effects A to C) is specified. The processing (S1609 to S1611) for setting the notice effect (the big hit confirmation notice effect, the big hit expectation large notice effect). When the number of consecutive reselections reaches 10 or more, by stopping the reselection, it is prevented (restricted) that the "reselection" continues to be selected (determined) endlessly and the type of notice production is not determined. it can. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display one of the notice effects at the display timing of the notice effect.

Processing for canceling this re-selection of the notice effect and setting a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, big hit expectation large notice effect) different from the normal notice effect (notice effect A to C) (S1609-). In S1611), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (whether the variable display for setting the notice effect is a variable display for notifying the big hit) (S1609). In the process of S1609, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S1609: Yes), the jackpot confirmation is suggested as a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, jackpot expectation large notice effect). A display notice effect command for notifying the notice effect is set (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, in the process of S1609, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (is out) (S1609: No), as a specific notice effect (big hit confirmation notice effect, jackpot expectation large notice effect), A display notice effect command for notifying a notice effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

As described above, when the “reselection” is continuously determined a predetermined number of times (10 times) or more, a specific notice effect (a big hit confirmed notice effect, a large jackpot expectation degree) not specified in the notice effect selection table 222b. By setting (preliminary notice effect), it is possible to make the player think that a rare notice effect has been displayed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the probability that “reselection” is determined 10 times in succession is a very low probability of 6/256 to the 10th power (about 1/2 K). Therefore, by displaying a specific notice effect (a big hit confirmation notice effect, a big hit expectation degree large notice effect), it is possible to make the player have more joy.

In the processing of S1612 executed after the processing of S1610, S1611, or S1614, the value of the advance notice reselection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1612), the advance notice reselection flag 223e is set to OFF (S1613), and this processing is executed. To finish. By the notice reselection process (see FIG. 34), the notice effect is reselected every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 30) to determine the type of notice effect without stopping other processes. can do.

In the present embodiment, the trigger for ending the re-selection of the notice effect is the case where “re-selection” is repeated 10 times, but the trigger is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined number of times of "reselection" may be set to a large number (for example, 20 times) or a small number (for example, 5 times). Further, it is of course possible that the predetermined time elapses (for example, 3 seconds after the first “reselection” is selected).

In the present embodiment, when the re-selection of the notice effect is terminated, a specific notice effect (a big hit confirmed notice effect, a big hit expectation large notice effect) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, it may be set so that it does not exist.

In the present embodiment, the reselection is performed in selecting the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform reselection in the selection of the effect mode of the effect (so-called button press effect) displayed when the button is pressed.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 49. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1701), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1701) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1701) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1801). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1802). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1801.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1802, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1802, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1803). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1804), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1701 in FIG. 35). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 35) (S1805), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S1701), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, and thus the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 36, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1801 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1801 is a boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S1802. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1803 to S1805 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1801 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1801. Alternatively, the processing of S1803 to S1805 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1802.

Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1803 to S1805 without performing the processes of S1801 and S1802. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot process time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1702). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thereby, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1703). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1703, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1704). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1704, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1705). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during this period, the V-interrupt processing (see FIG. 37(b)) causes the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. The determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to stand by until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main control device 110 gives a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1705, the interrupt permission is set (S1706), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1706, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1901), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 37(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2001: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal rendering is performed instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2002) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2003) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2002), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43.

In the display setting process (S2003), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2002) or the like. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2004). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2003) or the simple display setting processing (S2009). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2005). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2006). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2004), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005). The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2007). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2007, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-position, complete disconnection, chance) The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2008) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2009) is executed to execute the simple display setting process of S2004. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2002), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2003) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2102), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2103).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2104), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2104: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2105), the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2201).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, there is no reception of two or more display fluctuation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, so the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed a time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2201 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2202).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2201, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2203), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2204), and both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2205). When the process of S2205 ends, a pointer value (a value of the pointer 233f) indicating the execution start timing of the notice effect corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and a pointer indicating the execution start timing of the special notice effect. The value (the value of the pointer 233f) is read out and stored in the effect timing storage area 233i (S2206), and this processing ends.

By storing the execution start timing of the notice production and the special notice production in the production timing storage area 233i, the notice production data table or the special notice production data for the address after the stored timing (the value of the pointer 233f). The notice effect can be easily set only by adding the specified contents of the table.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2204 is updated, while the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2201. From the display data table, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is transferred by the processing of S2202. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data has been set in the process of S2203 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. In the processing of S2104, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2106), If there is a display variation type command (S2106: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2107), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the stop type command process (S2107) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete omission, chance chance) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S2301), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2302).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S2303), the stop type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2004), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2302 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2303, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2302.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will confuse the pachinko machine 10 with the "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S2106, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2106: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display notice effect command (S2108). If there is a display notice effect command (S2108: Yes), a notice effect command process for setting the notice effect is executed (S2109), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the notice effect command process (S2109) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the notice effect command process. This notice effect command process is a process for setting a notice effect of the type notified by the display notice effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the notice effect command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the notice effect can be set (S2401). Here, the timing at which the notice effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the notice effect. That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the notice effect in this variation pattern, it is determined that the notice effect can be set in the process of S2401. In order to secure the processing time for setting the notice effect, a predetermined time before the start of the notice effect may be set as the reference time and it may be determined whether the time is earlier than the reference time. .. As a result, even if the processing time for setting the notice effect is long, the notice effect setting process is started by the reference time described above, so the notice effect setting process is completed by the time the notice effect is started. Can be made

In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that it is time to set the notice production (S2401: Yes), the notice production data table corresponding to the type of the notice production notified by the display production command for display is determined, Data is added after the pointer position corresponding to the notice presentation timing of the display data table buffer 233d (S2402), and the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice production is not the settable timing (S2401: No), re-selection is continuously determined in the notice production selection process (S1406) of the voice lamp control device 113. This is a case in which the timing at which the notice effect for display is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which the special notice effect for executing the notice effect in a special display mode can be set (S2403).

Here, the timing at which the special notice effect can be set specifically means that the value of the pointer 233f is less than the pointer value stored in the effect timing storage area 233i as the start timing of the special notice effect. .. That is, if it is temporally before the timing of starting the special notice effect in this variation pattern, it is determined in step S2403 that the special notice effect can be set.

In the process of S2403, when it is determined that the special notice effect can be set (S2403: Yes), the special notice data table corresponding to the display notice effect command for display is determined and the special notice effect of the display data table is determined. The pointer position corresponding to the timing is set (S2404), and the process proceeds to S2405. The special notice effect is an effect that executes the notice effect in a special display mode, and an effect that is executed from the start timing of the notice effect based on the notified notice effect command for display (for example, a boy in the center of the screen). Is a production that is executed in a special display mode different from that shown in FIG.

By the processing of S2403 and S2404, even if the timing at which the display notice effect command is notified exceeds the start timing of the notice effect, a special effect different from the notice effect (notice effect A to C, a particular notice effect) The special notice effect can be displayed in various display modes. As a result, even when the notification timing of the display notice effect command is delayed, the special notice effect can be displayed based on the notified notice effect command for display while avoiding the overlapping display with other effects. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not a timing when the special notice effect can be set (S2403: No), the process directly proceeds to S2405. In the process of S2405, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2405), the present process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this notice effect command processing, the notice effect data table corresponding to the notified notice effect type is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to easily set the notice effect. be able to. In addition, when performing the combination, the display specified in the notice production data table is displayed for each address after the address (the value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the start timing of the notice production specified in the production timing storage area 233j. It is configured to add content. That is, in the notice production data table, the display content after the start timing of the notice production is defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently than in the case where the addresses for all the varying times are prepared in the notice effect data table.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S2108, if it is determined that there is no display preview effect command (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2110: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2111), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2110, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2112), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2112: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2601). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2605), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. In the processing of S2112, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2114), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2114: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2115) and the process returns to S2101.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2702).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. In the process of S2114, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2116), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2116: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2117), and the process returns to S2101.

Details of the back image change command process (S2117) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2802. .. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2004), when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in S2802. From that, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. In the process of S2116, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2116: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2118), and there is an error command. If (S2118: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2119), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2119) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2902), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is dealt with. Processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in step S2902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. When it is determined in the process of S2118 that there is no error command (S2118: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2120), and the process returns to S2101.

In the processing of S2101 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes). ), and the processes of S2102 to S2120 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2101 to S2120 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2101 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2008) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 39B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and For a command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 39A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2201. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2202, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, details of the above-described display setting process (S2003) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task process (S2004), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer updating process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address in which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 44, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering image developed in the process of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display. Therefore, it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2004), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2009) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 37(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. A process of setting the display data table that defines that the image (one of FIGS. 13B and 13C) to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2005), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing in S3401, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (resident video RAM 235 in this case), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 37B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2008 in FIG. 37B) and the simple display setting process (see S2009 in FIG. 37B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 38 to 43) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 46) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 48) (see S3301: No in FIG. 47A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2005) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2003). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and then receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3507: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S3509).

If the back image change flag 233w is turned on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is turned off (S3510), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state among the back image discrimination flags 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3509, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S3509: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is directly terminated.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3513 (S3513: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. Along with the setting of the display data table, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, by the transfer data table, the transfer target image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, details of the above-described drawing process (S2006) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2004) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2004). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites that should be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2005), the start address of the character ROM 234 (the storage source start address) in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 37B) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the predetermined determination (the determination of the type of the notice effect to be displayed) is executed, the determination is performed again at the predetermined ratio (6/256). (The notice production is reselected). Further, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which the determination result is derived without being reselected is a sharp number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (notice productions A to C) is determined in the predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (the number after the decimal point is zero).

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute various kinds of lottery, such as a lottery for winning or not based on a winning of a game ball to a start winning port, and a lottery for a mode of display effect. In these lottery results, different lottery results are obtained depending on the random number value selected, and thus randomness can be given to the lottery results.

However, since random numbers used for various kinds of lottery are generated by a dedicated IC or the like, it is common in the specifications of the IC that the denominator of the lottery is a bit unit (a power of 2). Therefore, when the probability of each lottery result is converted into a percentage, a fraction (decimal point) is usually generated. That is, the percentage could not be converted into an integer. Therefore, it may be difficult to intuitively understand the lottery probability for each lottery result. In addition, even when designing a gaming machine, the design may be inefficient because it may be necessary to temporarily set an integer percentage as a probability target and calculate the number of random numbers that are closest to the set target. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the random number values for which reselection is determined are distributed such that the probability parameter in a predetermined lottery is 250, which is a multiple of 50, a minimum of 2% (1 parameter It is possible to distribute the probability of each lottery result by a percentage of /50). That is, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be easily converted into an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the lottery result is intuitively understandable. Further, by converting the percentage of the probability of each lottery result into an integer, it is possible to efficiently design the probability of each lottery result at the time of design.

In this embodiment, an IC that generates any of 8-bit (256 ways) values is adopted as the random number for production IC 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an IC that can generate a 10-bit (1024 ways) value may be adopted. In this case, in order to convert the percentage into an integer, for example, 1000 values, which are multiples of 100, are used for selecting the notice effect, and when 24 values different from the 1000 values are acquired, the re-lottery is performed. It may be configured to do so. Then, each effect may be associated with the number of random value (determination value) as 10 (1/100 of the population) as the minimum unit. With such a configuration, since the percentage of the probability of each lottery result can be set with an integer value in 1% increments, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy. .. Further, for example, an IC having a bit number smaller than 8 bits (for example, 5 bits) may be adopted. In this case, of the 128 random numbers that can be generated by the IC, 100 values may be used for selecting the notice effect, and the remaining 28 values may be associated with the re-lottery. Also in this case, since the percentage can be made an integer, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the probability is easy to understand and the design is easy. Note that the percentage is not limited to being an integer, and may be in the unit of 0.1%.

In the present embodiment, the value of the random number (so-called hardware random number) generated by the random number generation IC is used as the effect random number value, but the value is not limited to this. For example, it is of course possible to use a value of a random number (so-called software random number) generated by software processing.

In this embodiment, when the lottery for the notice effect is executed, the reselection is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256), but the lottery for which the reselection can be decided is the lottery for the notice effect. It is not limited to. For example, reselection may be determined at a predetermined ratio even in the lottery when selecting the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 222a. Further, the lottery capable of determining reselection is not limited to the lottery executed in the voice lamp control device 113. For example, it may be configured such that reselection is selected at a predetermined rate when a lottery for a special symbol big hit or a lottery for a big hit type or the like. With this configuration, when the probability of being a jackpot, the probability of being a jackpot type, etc. are expressed as a percentage, they can be expressed as integer values. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose specifications are easier to understand.

In the present embodiment, when the “reselection” is determined 10 times or more in the lottery for determining the notice effect, the lottery for determining the notice effect is terminated, and a specific notice effect different from the normal ( Although the special notice effect) is executed, the number of times that it is determined that the lottery is terminated is not limited to 10 times, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, by setting the number of times more than 10 times, it is possible to more surely determine any of the types of the notice effects (notice effects A to C). Further, for example, by making the number less than 10 times, even when the “reselection” is continuously determined, the lottery of the form of the notice effect can be terminated with a smaller number of determinations, so the notice effect is determined. It is possible to reduce the time required until.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect previously notified from the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to start at the timing (the value of the pointer 233f) defined in the effect timing storage area 233i, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the process for determining the advance notice effect when it is determined that the start time of the advance notice effect is reached. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to immediately start displaying the notified notice effect. With such a configuration, the timing of notifying the type of the notice effect changes according to the number of times "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting the notice effect, so that the timing of starting the notice effect can be changed. it can. That is, since not only the type of notice production but also the start timing can be varied, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, in order to give variations to the timing of starting the notice effect, when “reselect” is determined, the process of selecting the notice effect again is executed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. You may do it.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 63. In the above-described first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 draws the type of the notice effect, “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). Further, the number of judgment values corresponding to “reselection” is set such that the number of judgment values from which the judgment result is derived without being reselected is a sharp number (eg, a multiple of 50). .. That is, when the probability that each determination result (preliminary presentation effects A to C) is determined in a predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage (percentage), it is set to be an integer percentage (the number after the decimal point is zero).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in a part of the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, “reselection” is determined at a predetermined ratio (6/256). I am configuring. Accordingly, in the lottery (lottery of the variation pattern) in the main controller 110, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern) is determined is expressed as a percentage (percentage), an integer percentage (the number after the decimal point is zero). Becomes

In addition, when the result of the lottery corresponding to the “reselection” continuously occurs and the timing of notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern is delayed, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a specific effect (weight progress effect). Is configured to run. While the "reselection" continues, the lottery result is in an indefinite state, and thus the variable time is not determined. That is, the display of the variation pattern cannot be started. In this case, by executing a specific effect (weight progress effect), even if the state in which the lottery result is indefinite continues for a long time ("reselection" continues for many times), the gaming machine operates normally. It can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the game can be played with peace of mind.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration in that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are input/output to/from the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the port 205, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is different. Partly changed, part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113. A part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a general figure random number generation IC 901 for the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 are provided. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 is used to generate various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning. Further, the universal figure random number generation IC 901 is used to generate a counter value (random number value) acquired based on the sphere passing through the through gate 67. That is, instead of various counters stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (first random number counter C1, first random type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, second random number counter C4). Then, the counter value (random number value) used for various kinds of lottery (determination) executed in the main controller 110 is acquired from an external IC. With such a configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in the second embodiment, the random number generation IC 800 for effect in the first embodiment is abolished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, the special figure random number generation IC 900 is provided with four types of registers (a first random number register R1, a first per type register R2, a stop type selection register R3, and a variation type register RS1). There is. Each of these registers plays a role similar to that of the random number storage unit of the random number generation IC for production 800 in the first embodiment. That is, each register stores a random number value generated by the random number generation unit corresponding to each register, and outputs a random number value to the outside when there is an instruction to read the random number value.

The random number value (register value) updated in the first random number register R1 is used to determine whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. That is, the register value of the first per random number register R1 corresponds to the first per random number counter C1 in the first embodiment, and the random number value (see FIG. 8A) defined in the per first random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). The judgment value) is compared. The first random number register R1 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 255. The stored value is updated, for example, twice every 10 μs (200 kHz cycle). Regarding the other registers, the update frequency of the stored value is the same as that of the first random number register R1, and only the range of the stored value is different.

The register value updated in the first hit type register R2 is used to select the big hit type of the special symbol. That is, the value of the first hit type register R2 corresponds to the first hit type counter C2 in the first embodiment, and is a random number value (specified in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B)). The judgment value) is compared. A random value in the range of 0 to 127 is stored in the first hit type register R2.

The register value updated in the stop type selection register R3 is used to select a stop type out of the special symbol. That is, the value of the stop type selection register R3 corresponds to the stop type selection counter C3 in the first embodiment, and is compared with the random number value (judgment value) defined in the stop type selection table (not shown) to be a special symbol. The stop type of is determined (selected). The stop type selection register R3 stores a random value in the range of 0 to 127.

The register value updated in the variation type register RS1 is used to select a variation pattern (variation time). That is, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the first embodiment, and is a random number value (determination) defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C). Value) and the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined. A random value in the range of 0 to 255 is stored in the fluctuation type selection register RS1. The random number value (register value) acquired from each register of the special figure random number generation IC 900 (first random number register R1, first per type register R2, stop type selection register R3, variation type register RS1) is After being temporarily stored in the figure counter temporary storage area 203j, it is transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. That is, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j is the first random number counter buffer, the first hit type counter buffer, the stop type selection counter buffer, the fluctuation type counter buffer (see FIG. 6) of the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment. This is a storage area corresponding to (see).

Further, the general-purpose random number generation IC 901 is provided with one type of register (second random number register R4). The register value updated in the second random number register R4 is normally used to determine whether or not a symbol is hit. That is, the value stored in the second per-random number register R4 corresponds to the second per-random number counter C4 in the first embodiment, and is the random number defined in the per-second random number table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is compared with a numerical value (judgment value), and it is judged whether or not a normal symbol is hit. A random value in the range of 0 to 255 is stored in the second random number register R4.

The random number value (register value) acquired from the second per-random number register R4 of the random number generation IC 901 for ordinary figures is temporarily stored in the temporary figure counter temporary storage area 203k, and then the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area. It is transferred to the empty area 203b. That is, the general-purpose counter temporary storage area 203k is a storage area corresponding to the second random number counter buffer of the counter buffer 203y in the first embodiment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the various determinations executed in the main control device 110 are performed by the random numbers generating IC 900 for special figures and the random number generating IC 901 for general figures provided outside the main control device 110. It is configured to execute based on (hardware random number). With such a configuration, the storage area for storing various counter values in the RAM 203 can be reduced, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be saved. Moreover, since the process of updating various counter values can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a random number generation IC (random number generation IC 900 for special figure and random number generation IC 901 for general figure) whose random number value is updated (generated) twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz) is used. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update (generate) a random number value when acquiring a value from each random number generation IC may be used. As a result, the number of times a random number value is updated (generated) in the random number generation IC can be minimized, so that power consumption can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a random number generation IC (a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a general figure random number generation IC 901) that can obtain a random number value that is a random value each time it is updated (generated) is used. It is not limited to. For example, by using a random number generation IC that updates the value one by one at short time intervals (for example, 1 μs), the timing of acquiring the value from the random number generation IC becomes irregular, so that a substantially random value is generated. Of course, it may be acquired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52A, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 52A, the RAM 203 of this embodiment has a main reselection counter 203h and a main reselection flag 203i in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. Further, instead of the counter buffer 203y, a special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and a general figure counter temporary storage area 203k are provided.

The main reselection counter 203h is a counter that indicates the number of times that "reselection" has been continuously selected in a predetermined determination (determination of fluctuation pattern) performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type register RS1 and the variation type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C), a predetermined pattern is determined. “Reselection” is selected at a ratio of (6/256). When this "reselection" is selected, the random number value (the value of the fluctuation type counter RS1) used for determining the fluctuation pattern, as in the case where "reselection" is selected when selecting the notice effect in the first embodiment. Is newly obtained, and the variation pattern (variation time) is determined again based on the new random number value. Here, the fluctuation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is completed. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) needs to be quickly determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined without executing other processing. To do. However, if "reselection" continues for too many times, the period during which other processing (for example, start winning processing or through-gate passage processing) is not executed becomes long, and, for example, starting winning can be detected. There is a possibility that it does not exist or that the passage of the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main reselection counter 203h counts the number of times the "reselection" is continuously determined, and when the "reselection" is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more. Is configured to execute another process that is once executed by the MPU 201, and then re-obtain the value of the variation type register RS1 to perform the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute the process for determining the variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

The initial value of the main reselection counter 203h is set to 0, and "reselection" is determined in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). Each time it is performed, 1 is added to the value (see S333 in FIG. 56). In addition, “reselection” is determined four times or more consecutively, and is initialized to 0 when the process for selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time) is temporarily interrupted (see S336 in FIG. 56). ..

Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d, which is a data table in which "reselection" is associated with a part of the random number value (judgment value), will be described with reference to FIG. This fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used to select a fluctuation pattern, like the fluctuation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment, but the specified contents are changed from the first embodiment. First, FIG. 53A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the present embodiment, “reselection” is associated with some of the determination values (random number values). Further, the distribution of the determination value (random number value) to other determination results is changed by allocating the determination value (random number value) to “reselection”.

Specifically, various normal reach (30 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of "0 to 24" as the determination value, and super reach various (60 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of "25 to 174". The variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “175 to 249”. Then, "reselection" is associated with the remaining determination values of "250 to 255". By setting the number of judgment values (random number values) for which “reselection” is determined to be 6 from “250 to 255”, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), and special reach ( The total number of random number values for determining (90 seconds) can be set to 250 (0 to 249). 1% corresponds to 2.5 random number values (judgment value) (250/100), so if you assign a random value (judgment value) with 5 (2%) as the minimum unit, the percentage of probability is calculated. It can be an integer value.

In the present embodiment, 25 (5×5) determination values “0 to 24” are assigned to various normal reach types (30 seconds), and “25 to 174” values are assigned to various super reach types (60 seconds). 150 (5×30) determination values are assigned, and 75 (5×15) determination values of “175 to 249” are assigned to various special reach (90 seconds). Therefore, the probability of selecting normal reach types is 10% (2% x 5), the probability of selecting super reach types (60 seconds) is 60% (2% x 30), and the special reach types (90 seconds) Is 30% (2%×15). That is, the random number value (judgment value) is assigned such that the percentage of the rate at which each variation pattern is selected is an integer value. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a fraction (decimal point or less) in the percentage, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine with more easily understandable specifications. In addition, even at the time of designing, it is possible to efficiently allocate the probability of each determination result.

The random value (judgment value) is similarly applied to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53B) and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (refer to FIG. 53C). "Reselection" is associated with the range of "250 to 255". That is, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined only when the value has 250 values (0 to 249) out of 256 random number values (determination values). Further, the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern is set to be a multiple of 5, so that the percentage of the probability that each variation pattern (variation time) is selected is integerized. This makes it possible to make the probability easier to understand regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss.

Returning to FIG. 52A, the description will be continued. The main reselection flag 203i is a flag that indicates whether or not "reselection" has been continuously determined a predetermined number of times (4 times) or more in the process of selecting (determining) the variation pattern (variation time). If the main reselection flag 203i is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined four times or more in succession, and if it is off, the number of consecutive "reselections" is less than four. means. In the main reselection processing (see FIG. 59) executed in the timer interrupt processing 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the main reselection flag 203i is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 59), and the main reselection is performed. If the selection flag 203i is ON, a process for newly acquiring a random number value from the variation type register RS1 and determining a variation pattern (variation time) (see S4102 to S4107 in FIG. 59) is executed.

As described above, the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j and the general figure counter temporary storage area 203k are temporary storage areas for temporarily storing each register value in place of the counter buffer 203y (FIG. 51). reference). Each random number value (register value) acquired from the special symbol random number generation IC 900 is stored in the special symbol counter temporary storage area 203j, and then transferred to an empty area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. In addition, the random number value (register value) acquired from the random number generation IC 901 for universal figure is stored in the temporary figure counter temporary storage area 203k, and then transferred to the empty area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52B, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment has a weight measurement counter 223g and a weight measurement flag 223h added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment.

The weight measurement counter 223g is a state in which at least one variation is suspended (a state in which the value of the special symbol retaining sphere counter 223b is 1 or more), and the variation display (variation pattern) ends, the variation display ends. This is a counter for measuring the elapsed time since. This weight measurement counter 223g is incremented by 1 in the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) after the stop command is received in the state where the number of reserved balls is 1 or more until the next variable display is started. .. The weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) is executed every 1 millisecond elapses in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113, so the weight measurement counter 223g is set to 1 every 1 millisecond. Are added one by one. In the present embodiment, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is referred to in the weight progress effect process (see FIG. 63) (see S4205 in FIG. 63), and the predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed since the last variation was completed. It is configured to execute a specific effect (weight progress effect) when the next pending change is not started even after the elapse (the fluctuation pattern command is not output from main controller 110) (FIG. 63). S4206).

Here, the case where the variation pattern command is not output from the main control device 110 even after the lapse of a predetermined period means that the processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the main control device 110 requires time. Etc. That is, in the process of determining the variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d, “reselection” is continuously determined, a new random number value (judgment value) is acquired from the variation type register RS1, and is defined in the variation pattern table 202d. This is the case when the process of comparing with the determined value is repeated endlessly. If the variation pattern (variation time) is not determined, the variation pattern command cannot be set from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the previous variation ends as the “reselection” is repeated. The period from the start to the start of the next fluctuation becomes longer. In this case, if the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to wait until the variation pattern command is received, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Nevertheless, since the display content of the third symbol display device 81 does not change, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) elapses without starting the next variation after the last variation pattern (variation display) ends, a specific effect (weight) It is configured to execute a stage effect). As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed, so that the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally even if the next variation effect is not started. it can. As the weight progress effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, there is little effect on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be immediately terminated). Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or more stop symbols are shining is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect with a bright pattern), even if the variation pattern command is received during the effect and the variation is started, it is possible for the player to have less discomfort. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

The weight measurement flag 223h is a flag that indicates whether or not the previous fluctuation has ended and the fluctuation pattern command has not been notified when the number of reserved balls is 1 or more. That is, it indicates whether or not it is a period in which the time measurement (count) by the weight measurement counter 223g is executed. If the weight measurement flag 223h is turned on, it means that the previous variation effect has been completed and the next variation pattern command has not been notified. Therefore, during this period, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61) is executed. The value of the weight measurement counter 223g is updated every time it is performed (see S4202 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, if the weight measurement flag 223h is off, the weight measurement counter 223g is not updated because it is not a period waiting for the main controller 110 to notify the variation pattern command. The weight measurement flag 223h is set to ON when the stop command is received from the main control device 110 and a holding ball exists (S1335 in FIG. 62). Further, it is set to OFF each time a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110 (see S1332 in FIG. 62). The weight measurement flag 223h can accurately update the weight measurement counter 223g.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, like the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. For example, every 2 milliseconds. This is a regular process that is executed by.

Of the timer interrupt processing 2 in the second embodiment, S101, S106, S108, and S109 are respectively S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment. , And the same processing as S109.

Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the start winning process (see FIG. 22), the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. ), a special symbol variation process 2 (S104), a start winning process 2 (S105), a through gate passage process 2 (S107) are respectively executed. Details of each of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54) in the present embodiment, when the process of S108 ends, in the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time) (special symbol variation start process 2), a predetermined number of times or more (4 times). When the reselection is determined, the main reselection process that is a process for determining the variation pattern (variation time) is executed (S131), and the process proceeds to S109. Details of the main reselection process (S131) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 2 (S104), similarly to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the like. , Is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second embodiment, in each process of S201 to S207, S209 to S218, S201 to S207, S209 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 20) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S218 to S218 is performed. In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the process is not fluctuating in S202 (S202: No), a predetermined time has elapsed since the last stop display of the third symbol. It is determined whether or not (1 second) has elapsed (S231), and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S231: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S231, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S231: Yes), the processes of S203 to S208 are executed. In the process of S208 in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. Details of this special symbol variation process 2 (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) is, similar to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, "a special symbol jackpot. Or, the lottery of “the deviation of the special symbol” (whether or not to judge) is performed, and the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. This is processing for.

In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S208) in the second embodiment, in each process of S301 to S311, each process of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), when the process of S307 or S309 ends, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53C) in the process of S307 or S309, It is determined whether or not “reselection” is determined (selected) based on the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 (S331). When it is determined that "reselection" is determined in the process of S331 (S331: Yes), the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is newly acquired from the random number generation IC 900 for special figures (S332), and the main reselection is performed. 1 is added to the value of the selection counter 203h (S333). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334), and if the value is less than 4 (S334: No), each of S305 to S309 for selecting the variation pattern. Execute the process again.

On the other hand, in the process of S334, when it is determined that the value of the main reselection counter 203h is 4 or more (S334: Yes), the process of repeating the reselection of the variation pattern is once ended and the main reselection flag 203i is set. It is turned on (S335). Then, the main reselection counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S336), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S331, when it is determined that "reselection" is determined in the process of S307 or S309 (S331: No), the process proceeds to S310. By the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56), the variation pattern is determined, and when “reselection” is determined, reselection of the variation pattern can be repeated. Here, the fluctuation pattern cannot be started unless the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is completed. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) needs to be quickly determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined, the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is immediately reacquired and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined without executing other processing. To do. However, if "reselection" continues for too many times, the period during which other processing (for example, start winning processing or through-gate passage processing) is not executed becomes long, and, for example, starting winning can be detected. There is a possibility that it does not exist or that the passage of the through gate 67 cannot be detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main reselection counter 203h counts the number of times the "reselection" is continuously determined, and when the "reselection" is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) or more. Is configured to execute another process that is once executed by the MPU 201, and then re-obtain the value of the variation type register RS1 to perform the process of determining the variation pattern (variation time). With this configuration, it is possible to quickly execute the process for determining the variation pattern within a range that does not affect other processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the starting winning process 2 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 2 (S105) in the second embodiment.

Of the starting winning process (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S401 to S405 are the same as the respective processes of S401 to S405 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Is executed.

In the start winning process 2 (S105) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 in the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the first random number register R1 , The first hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900, stored in the special figure counter temporary storage area 203j (S431), and the process proceeds to S402. ..

Further, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), when the process of S405 is completed, each value of the special symbol counter temporary storage area 203j provided in the RAM 203 is stored in the free space of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. (S432), this process ends. By this start winning process 2 (see FIG. 57), various random number values (various register values) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 can be obtained and used for the special symbol lottery. By using a random number generated by hardware for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the through gate passage process 2 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage process 2 (S107) in the second embodiment. This through-gate passage process 2 (S107) determines whether or not the ball passes through the through-gate 67 as in the case of the through-gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. , Is a process for acquiring and holding a random number value used for a normal design hit lottery.

In the through gate passage process 2 (S107), in each process of S601 to S604, the same process as each of S601 to S604 of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. .. Further, in the through gate passage process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), the value of the second random number register R4 is set. It is acquired from the random number generation IC 901 for universal figure, stored in the temporary figure counter temporary storage area 203k (S631), and the process proceeds to S602.

In addition, in the through gate passage process 2 (S107) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 ends, the value of the general-use symbol counter temporary storage area 203k provided in the RAM 203 is set to an empty area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. The data is stored (S632), and this processing ends. By this through-gate passage processing 2 (see FIG. 58), various random number values (various register values) generated by the random number generation IC 901 for universal figure can be acquired and used for lottery of ordinary symbols. By using a random number generated by hardware for the lottery, the lottery result can be made more random.

Next, the main reselection process (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main reselection process (S131) is one of the timer interrupt processes 2 (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 56). In the process for determining the variation pattern of, when the "reselection" is determined four or more times in succession, the process for selecting the variation pattern based on the determination of the "reselection" after the fourth time. is there.

In the main reselection process (S131), first, it is determined whether the main reselection flag 203i is on (S4101). If the main reselection flag 203i is off (S4101: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 2. If the main reselection flag 203i is turned on (S4101: Yes), the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 (S4102), and the jackpot lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type register RS1 are acquired. The variation pattern is determined based on the following (S4103). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation pattern is "reselection" (S4104). If the determined variation pattern is re-selection (S4104: Yes), this processing ends. In this way, when "reselection" is determined from the variation pattern table 202d, the process is ended while the main reselection flag 203i is kept in the ON state, so that the next timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 54). In the main reselection process (S131) executed in step S), the process of reselecting the variation pattern can be performed again.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the determined variation pattern is not reselection (S4104: No), the variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern determined in the process of S4103 (S4105), and the setting is performed. A stop type command is set based on the displayed display mode (S4106). Next, the main reselection flag 203i is set to off (S4107), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main process 2 in the second embodiment. The main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment is for executing the main control of the game by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, similarly to the main processing (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment. Processing.

Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915, each of S901, S903 to S909, and S912 to S915 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S902, S910, and S911 of the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are abolished (deleted). In the present embodiment, the random number value (register value) generated by the special figure random number generation IC 900 is used for various types of lottery, and it is not necessary to generate the random number value by software. Therefore, various counter values are updated S902. The processes of S910 and S911 are abolished. It is the same as the main process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, except that each of these processes is abolished. As described above, in the main processing 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the random number generation ICs (special figure random number generation IC 900 and general figure random number generation IC 901) are used to generate a random number value by software. Processing (S902, S910, and S911) can be omitted, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main process 2 in the second embodiment. Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 61), in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1213 to S1218, the same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment is executed.

Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, after executing the processes of S1201 to S1210, a weight progress effect process described later is executed (S1231). Although the details will be described later, in the weight progress effect process (S1231), a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) has elapsed without starting the next variation since the last variation pattern (variation display) is finished. In this case, it is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect).

After the execution of the wait progress effect (S1231), the command determination processing 2 (S1212) is executed instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and the processing from S1213 is executed. Details of the command determination processing 2 (S1212) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment. The command determination process 2 (S1212) in the second embodiment determines the command received from the main control device 110, and determines the command type, as in the command determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. This is a process for executing control.

Of the command determination processing 2 (S1212) in this second embodiment, in each processing of S1301 to S1308 and S1316, each of S1301 to S1308 and S1316 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1303 ends, the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is initialized to 0 (S1331), and the weight measurement flag 223h is set to OFF. (S1332), this process ends.

Further, in the command determination process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1307 that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1307: No), it is then determined whether a stop command has been received (S1333). ). If the stop command is received (S1333: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a holding ball based on the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (S1334), and there is a holding ball (that is, special symbol holding). When it is determined that the value of the sphere counter 203c is 1 or more (S1334: Yes), the weight measurement flag 223h is set to OFF (S1335), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S1334, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball (S1334: No), the present process is directly terminated.

By setting the weight measurement flag 223h of the hold ball to ON, the state where the previous fluctuation has ended and the fluctuation pattern command is not received despite the existence of the hold ball is counted (clocked). be able to. In the present embodiment, when this state continues for 1050 milliseconds, a specific effect (weight progress effect) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even if the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the player is present.

In the process of S1333, when it is determined that the stop command is not received (S1333: No), the process of S1316 is executed, and then the command determination process 2 is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a weight progress effect process (S1231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the weight progress effect process (S1231). This weight progress effect process (S1231) is a process for setting a specific effect (weight progress effect) as described above.

In the weight progress effect process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the weight measurement flag 223h is turned on (S4201). In the processing of S4201, when it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is off (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, when it is determined that the weight measurement flag 223h is on (S4201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the weight measurement counter 223g (S4202), and then the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000. It is determined whether it is larger (S4203). In the processing of S4202, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 3000 (S4203: Yes), it means that 3 seconds or more have passed since the last variation pattern (variation display) was finished. To do. That is, it means that the fluctuation pattern command cannot be received even though the time sufficient to receive the fluctuation pattern command has passed from the main controller 110. It is highly possible that a failure pattern 110 output from the main control device 110 could not be received normally due to a malfunction of the harness or the like (breakage or the like). Therefore, in this case, a display error command for setting a display for notifying the occurrence of an error to the player or the hall is set (S4204), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is 3000 or less (S4203: No), it is then determined whether the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 1050 (S4205). When it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is larger than 1050 (S4205: Yes), the variation pattern command is issued despite the fact that 50 milliseconds have elapsed after the symbol stop period of 1 second has elapsed. Means not receiving. That is, when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that “reselection” is continuously determined, and the determination of the variation pattern (variation time) is delayed. Therefore, in this case, a display weight progress effect command for setting the display of a specific effect (weight progress effect) is set (S4206), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4205, when it is determined that the value of the weight measurement counter 223g is smaller than 1050 (S4205: No), this processing is ended as it is.

The display weight progress effect command set in the process of S4206 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process 2 (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 (S1202). In the meantime, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display advance notice command, the display control device 114 displays a specific effect (weight progress effect) on the third symbol display device 81.

As the weight progress effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, there is little effect on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be immediately terminated). Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or more stop symbols are shining is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect with a bright pattern), even if the variation pattern command is received during the effect and the variation is started, it is possible for the player to have less discomfort. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, the weight progress effect is executed when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous variation display is finished, even though the number of reserved balls is 1 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, even if the change pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the previous change display is ended, the weight progress effect is not executed. Good. More specifically, when it is known in advance that the next change is a big hit, such as by pre-reading the jackpot determination result, the weight progress effect may not be executed. As a result, the player may feel a sense of incongruity that the variable display is not started even though the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, but after that, a jackpot is given to start the variable display. It can be impressed as if the delay was a precursor to a big hit. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined ratio (6/256) is determined in the predetermined determination (determination for determining the variation pattern) of the main control device 110 that executes the main control related to the game. ), "reselection" is selected. Further, the number of determination values corresponding to reselection is set so that the number of determination values from which the determination result is derived without being reselected is a sharp number (250). That is, when the probability that each determination result (variation pattern type) is determined in the predetermined determination is expressed as a percentage, it is set to be an integer percentage (the number after the decimal point is zero). Accordingly, when the probability of each determination result is expressed by a percentage, the value becomes easier to understand, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the specifications and the like can be more easily understood.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the variation effect is started based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening. This variation effect is started immediately (for example, within 1 second) after the winning when the winning is not held, and when the winning is held, immediately after the end of the varying effect based on the winning immediately before the holding. It is usually started (for example, within 1 second).

However, if the variation effect is not started promptly after the variation effect based on the winning after the winning or immediately before the suspension, since the game is not started in spite of the timing when the game is normally started, There is a risk of giving a player a sense of distrust.

For example, in the present embodiment, reselection is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256) in the process of determining the variation pattern of main controller 110. For this reason, when the “reselection” is continuously determined, the variation pattern is not determined during that period, and thus the period from the end of the variable display of 1 to the start of the next variable display is long. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern command is notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or more after the last variation display is completed, although the number of holding balls is 1 or more. If not performed, a specific effect (weight progress effect) is executed. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied even if the variation pattern command is not received, so that the pachinko machine 10 operates normally even if the next variation effect is not started. It is possible to make the player recognize that the player is present. As the weight progress effect, even if the variation pattern command is notified immediately after the effect is started, there is little effect on the variation time notified by the variation pattern command (effect that can be immediately terminated). Is executed. More specifically, for example, an effect in which one or more stop symbols are shining is executed until the change pattern command is notified. By executing a simple effect without a story (such as an effect with a bright pattern), even if the variation pattern command is received during the effect and the variation is started, it is possible for the player to have less discomfort. In addition, it can be recognized as if it was a sign of the start of fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is not notified for a predetermined period (1050 milliseconds) or longer, a specific effect (weight progress effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a specific effect (weight progress effect) when “reselection” is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) as a result of the variation pattern lottery.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the weight progress effect (effect in which the design is shining) is executed when 1050 milliseconds has elapsed since the last fluctuation stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the variation pattern command is not received, the variation of the symbol may be started. As a result, the next fluctuation starts at the latest 1050 milliseconds after the last stop of the symbol, so that the state of the symbol stop can be prevented (suppressed) from continuing for a long time. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind without feeling uncomfortable.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment is configured to acquire, one by one, the random number values used for the lottery (determination) of the type of the notice production from the production random number generation IC 800 when the lottery is executed. It was

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random number values are obtained in advance from the effect random number generation IC 800 and stored in the RAM 223, and the notice effect is used by using the stored random number value. It is configured to execute a lottery (decision). Further, when the random number value is acquired in advance, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a random number value that is “re-lottery” (that is, a random number value in the range of “250 to 255”), and “re-lottery” is performed. Is stored in the RAM 223. That is, the value corresponding to the “re-lottery” is not stored in the RAM 223 but is discarded. As a result, when the lottery (decision) process of the notice production is actually executed, the “re-lottery” is not decided, and the determination of the notice production is delayed due to the continuous “re-lottery”. This can be prevented (suppressed).

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that an RTC 292 that counts the current time is provided in the audio lamp control device 113. A part of the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the RTC 292 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. This RTC 292 can measure the current time. The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the time measured by the RTC 292. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a predetermined random number value is rendered to the RAM 223 when the power is turned on (when a predetermined number (100) of random number values is not stored in the RAM 223). The counter initial value table 222c is read and stored. In the effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality of pattern combinations are defined as initial values of 100 random number values stored in the RAM 223. In the present embodiment, different combinations of random number values are set as initial values according to the current time acquired from the RTC 292. This makes it possible to quickly determine the initial value of the random number and make the random number value set as the initial value a more random value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 65A, the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter initial value table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. The effect counter initial value table 222c is a data table used to select an initial value of the random number value that is referred to when selecting the notice effect. In this effect counter initial value table 222c, a plurality (10 patterns) of combinations of a predetermined number (100) of random number values that can be selected as initial values are defined. Further, all the random number values defined in the production counter initial value table 222c are values in the range of "0 to 249". That is, the random number value set as the initial value is a random number value other than the range of random number values for which “reselection” is determined (that is, “250 to 255”). Accordingly, when selecting the type of the notice effect, it is possible to select the type without selecting "reselection", so that the processing time for determining (selecting) the notice effect can be shortened.

When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the effect counter initial value table 222c is referred to and the initial value is selected. The selected initial value is stored in the effect counter storage area 223i described later.

Details of the effect counter initial value table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of specified contents of the effect counter initial value table 222c. As shown in FIG. 66, the production counter initial value table 222c defines 10 patterns (table Nos. 1 to 10) of combinations of 100 random number values (array Nos. 1 to 100). In the present embodiment, in the startup process 3 (see FIG. 67) executed based on the power-on, No. One of the tables 1 to 10 is selected and stored in the effect counter storage area 223i.

No. When acquiring any one of the tables 1 to 10, the table according to the current time measured by the RTC 292 is selected. More specifically, in the power-on time, if the last digit of the second is 1, the No. If the table of No. 1 is acquired and the last digit is 2, the No. 2 tables are obtained. Similarly, if the last digit is 3, then No. No. 3 table, if the last digit is 4 No. No. 4 table... If the last digit is 0. Ten tables are selected. This makes it possible to set a different combination of random number values as an initial value each time depending on the timing of turning on the power source, and thus to more randomly determine the type when determining (selecting) the notice effect.

The number of tables and the number of arrays of each table are not limited to those described above. For example, the number of tables may be 15 patterns or 5 patterns. The number of arrays may be 150, or may be 50.

The method of selecting the table according to the current time is not limited to the above. For example, the table may be selected according to the last digit of the millisecond of power-on time. Thereby, even when the power is turned on simultaneously for a plurality of gaming machines, the tables selected by the respective gaming machines can be made different (a random value is set in each gaming machine).

In this embodiment, the table is selected according to the current time measured by the RTC 292, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection may be made according to the measurement results (temperature, humidity, light amount, sound volume, etc.) of other measurement means, or the measurement results may be selected in combination. Further, the selection may be performed based on the random number value generated by the hardware random number generation IC, or the random number value may be generated by software processing and the selection may be performed based on the random number value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 65B, the RAM 223 in the present embodiment is provided with an effect counter storage area 223i, an acquisition pointer 223j, and a reacquisition flag 223k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. There is.

The effect counter storage area 223i is a storage area for storing the effect counter value (random number value for effect) used when deciding (selecting) the predictive effect from the predictive effect selection table 222b, and is stored by the acquisition pointer 223j described later. It is composed of 100 storage areas associated with the values to be obtained. In each storage area, one random number value (random number value for effect) used for determining the type of notice effect is stored. As for the random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, a new random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 each time one random number value is used for selecting the notice effect. The acquired random number value is overwritten in the storage area in which the random number value used for selecting the notice effect is stored (see S4305 in FIG. 69). As a result, the effect counter storage area 223i can maintain a state where 100 random number values generated at different timings are stored.

The acquisition pointer 223j is a pointer that indicates which of the 100 random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i should be selected. When selecting the type of the notice effect, the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is referred to, a random number for effect is selected from the storage area corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j, and the determination value defined in the notice effect selection table 222b is selected. The type of advance notice effect is determined based on the (random number value). The value of the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by 1 each time a random number value of 1 is acquired from the effect counter storage area 223i in order to determine the type of notice effect. As a result, the random number for effect can be set to a more random value.

The re-acquisition flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the effect random number value acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, a range of "250 to 255"). If the re-acquisition flag 223k is turned on, it means that the acquired random number value for performance is a value corresponding to "reselection", and it is necessary to acquire the random number value for performance again from the random number generation IC 800 for performance. To do. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not necessary to reacquire the random number value for presentation. The reacquisition flag 223k is set to ON when it is determined that the random number value for effect acquired from the random number generation IC for effect IC 800 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (S4304 in FIG. 69). Further, when a value within the range of “0 to 249” is acquired by reacquiring the random number value for presentation, it is set to off (see S4405 in FIG. 70).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 67, a startup process 3 in the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment will be described.

In the startup processing 3 of the third embodiment, in each processing of S1101 to S1111, the same processing as each processing of S1101 to S1111 of the startup processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26) is executed. Further, in the startup process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1110 ends, next, the time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1131), and based on the acquired time information. Then, from the effect counter initial value table 222c, a combination of initial values for 100 effect random numbers stored in the effect counter storage area 223i is selected and stored in the effect counter initial value table 222c (initial value is set) (S1132). ). When the process of S1132 ends, the process moves to the process of S1111.

In the startup process 3, by selecting a combination of initial values defined in the ROM 222 in advance and setting it in the effect counter storage area 223i, one initial value of the effect random number is generated from the effect random number generation IC 800. It is possible to more quickly determine the initial value of the random number for effect, as compared with the case of acquiring one. Therefore, it is possible to shift to a state in which the game can be executed by the player earlier.

Next, the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, in S1201 to S1210 and S1212 to S1218, S1201 to S1210 and S1212 in the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1218 is performed.

Further, in the main process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, when the random number value for effect stored in the effect counter storage area 223i last time is updated, it corresponds to “reselection”. When the performance random number value is acquired, re-acquisition processing for acquiring the performance random number value again and updating the performance counter storage area 223i is performed (S1261), and the process proceeds to S1212 and thereafter. The details of the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the notice effect selecting process 3 (S1406) in the second embodiment will be described. This advance notice effect selection process 3 (S1406) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) instead of the advance notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Similar to the notice effect selection process (see FIG. 33) in the form, it is a process for selecting the type of notice effect from the effect random number generated by the effect random number generation IC 800 and notifying it to the display control device 114.

In the notice effect selection process 3 (S1406), first, of the 100 effect random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, effect random numbers stored in the storage area (address) indicated by the value of the acquisition pointer 223j. A numerical value is acquired (S4301). Next, the register value of the effect random number generation IC 800 is acquired as a new effect random number value (S4302), and the acquired register value corresponds to "reselection" (that is, within the range of "250 to 255"). It is determined whether there is any (S4303).

In the process of S4303, when it is determined that the acquired register value (random number value for effect) is a value corresponding to “reselection” (that is, within the range of “250 to 255”) (S4303: Yes), By setting the acquisition flag 223k to ON, re-acquisition of the random number value for effect is set (S4304), and the process proceeds to S4306. On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, when it is determined that the register value acquired from the random number generation IC for production 800 is outside the range of “reselection” (that is, within the range of “0 to 249”) (S4303: No). The acquired register value is stored as a new random number value for performance in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value of the acquisition pointer 223j (S4305), and the process proceeds to S4306. To do.

In the process of S4306, the acquisition pointer 223j is updated by adding 1 (S4306), and it is determined whether or not the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is larger than 100 (S4307). In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is larger than 100 (S4307: Yes), the acquisition pointer 223j is initialized to 0 (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4309. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the value of the updated acquisition pointer 223j is 100 or less (S4307: No), the process of S4308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4309.

In the process of S4309, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect for setting the notice effect is a fluctuating effect for notifying the big hit (whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit) (S4309). When it is determined that there is (S4309: Yes), the announcement effect selection table 222b1 for jackpot (see FIG. 11B) and the announcement effect based on the effect random number (effect counter) acquired in the process of S4301. A type is selected (S4310), and the process proceeds to S4312.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4309, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit (S4309: No), the notice effect selection table for detachment 222b2 (see FIG. 11C) and the random number value for effect acquired in the processing of S4301 ( The advance notice effect is selected based on the effect counter) (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4312. In the process of S4312, a notice effect command is set based on the selection result of the notice effect (S4312), and this process ends.

Next, the reacquisition process (S1261) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this re-acquisition process (S1261) is performed when the effect random number value corresponding to "reselection" is acquired when updating the effect random number value stored in the effect counter storage area 223i last time. , Is a process for re-obtaining the effect random number and updating the effect counter storage area 223i.

In this reacquisition process (S1261), first, it is determined whether or not the reacquisition flag is 223k ON (S4401), and when it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (S4401: No), this process is directly performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, when it is determined that the re-acquisition flag 223k is ON (S4401: Yes), the register value (random number value for effect) is acquired from the random number generation IC for effect 800 (S4402). Next, it is determined whether or not the register value acquired in the process of S4402 is a value corresponding to "reselection" (that is, "250 to 255") (S4403), and a value corresponding to "reselection". If so (S4403: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the acquired register value is out of the range of “reselection” (that is, “0 to 249”) (S4403: No), the value of the acquisition pointer 223j is read, The register value (effect random number value) acquired in the process of S4402 is stored in the storage area (address) of the effect counter storage area 223i corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the read value (S4404). Next, the reacquisition flag 223k is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

By this re-acquisition process (S1261), since only the random number value for effect which is out of the range of "reselection" from the random number generating IC for effect 800 can be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the effect is selected when the notice effect is selected. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect random number value read from the counter storage area 223i from becoming a value corresponding to “reselection”. Therefore, it is possible to always select (determine) one of the types of the notice effects (the notice effects A to C) by the process of selecting the notice effect once, so that the processing time can be shortened.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a predetermined number (100) of random numbers for production are stored in advance in the production counter storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223, and the storage is performed in advance. It is configured to execute the lottery (decision) of the notice effect using the generated random number value for effect. By storing a plurality (100) of random number values in advance, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the random number values are not stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, so that the notice effect for each time is decided. Can be normally determined (determined) in the processing for. Also, each time the stored random number value is used to determine the notice effect, the used random number value is discarded, a new random number value is acquired from the effect random number generation IC 800, and the effect counter storage area 223i is overwritten. Is configured. By sequentially overwriting (updating) the content, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the same random number value from being repeatedly used for determination, and thus it is possible to secure the randomness of the random number value for presentation.

Further, the effect counter storage area 223i is controlled so as to store only a value outside the range of random number values for which "reselection" is determined (that is, a random number value in the range of "0-249"). .. With such a configuration, if a random number value of 1 is acquired from the predetermined number of random number values stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, the type of advance notice effect can be obtained by executing the determination of the advance notice effect only once. Can be decided (that is, any of the notice effects A to C can be decided without "reselection" being decided). Therefore, the time required for the process for determining the type of the notice effect can be shortened, so that the type of the notice effect can be surely notified to the display control device 114 by the start timing of the notice effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the random number value for effect stored in the effect counter storage area 223i when the power is turned on is defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c of the ROM 222, and the start-up process 3 (see FIG. 67). In the above, any combination of the initial values defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c is transferred to the effect counter storage area 223i. Further, all the effect random numbers defined in the effect counter initial value table 222c are values (“0 to 249”) within a range of any determination result (any of the notice effects A to C is determined). Value within the range). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the time required to store the initial value in the production counter storage area 223i, as compared with the case where the initial value is obtained from the production random number generation IC 800 one by one. When the initial value is obtained one by one from the rendering random number generation IC 800, each time a random number is obtained, it is determined whether or not the value is equivalent to "reselection", and "reselection" is performed. This is because, in the case of a value corresponding to “”, a new random number value must be acquired until a random number value within a range (within the range of “0 to 249”) that is one of the determination results is obtained. By shortening the time for storing the initial value of the predetermined number (100) of random numbers for production in the production counter storage area 223i, it is possible to shorten the period until the game by the pachinko machine 10 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, 100 random number values are stored in the effect counter storage area 223i, but the number is not limited to 100 and can be set arbitrarily.

In the present embodiment, a random number value (so-called hard random number value) generated by the production random number generation IC 800 is configured to be stored in the production counter storage area 223i in a predetermined number (100), but the number is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a predetermined number (for example, 100) of random number values generated by software processing (so-called software random number values) may be stored in the effect counter storage area 223i. Generally, the random number value of software is incremented by 1 in the processing of software. Therefore, when the value of the software random number is acquired again to re-select the lottery result, the random number value is likely to be a value that has not been sufficiently updated. That is, it is impossible to acquire a random number value that is a random value. Therefore, by storing a random number value in the effect counter storage area 223i in advance as in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a random number value that is a random value even when the lottery result is re-lotted.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, when the start winning is detected, various information (various counter values) used for the lottery of the special symbol is acquired, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. When is detected, the information (value of the second random number counter C4) normally used for the lottery of symbols is acquired. That is, the different acquisition operation is executed depending on whether the start winning is detected or the passage through the through gate 67 is detected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, both when the start winning is detected and when the passage through the through gate 67 is detected, all the random number values are collectively acquired and the detected content is detected. The random number required according to the above is used for the lottery (judgment). A random number value acquisition operation is performed in debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10 by collectively reading the random number value regardless of whether it is a start winning or passing through the through gate 67. Can be checked collectively.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are installed in the main controller 110. It is electrically connected to the output port 205, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, and some processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Is a point different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 71, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a special figure random number generation IC 900 and a general figure random number generation IC 901 for the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 are provided. And are electrically connected. The special figure random number generation IC 900 and the universal figure random number generation IC 901 are the same as the ICs of the same names provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, various counter values in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, in the present embodiment, the values of the registers provided in the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 (first random number register R1, first per type register R2, stop Random number values (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop type selection in the first embodiment) used for various kinds of lottery are the type selection register R3, the variation type register RS1, and the second per random number register R4. The counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4) are acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Further, these counter values are collectively acquired from each IC at the same timing and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p.

When the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting the start winning, the first random number register R1 and the first random number register R1 among the stored register values (random number values) are stored. The values of the hit type register R2 and the stop type selection register R3 are stored in the free space of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. On the other hand, when the value of each register is collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p by detecting the ball entering the through gate 67, the value of the second random number register R4 is the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It is stored in the empty area of.

Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value, the register temporary values (random number values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether to acquire the value (random number value) by specifying, the register value (random number value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. In addition, in debugging (operation verification) or the like in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value (register value) acquisition operation can be collectively confirmed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 73. As shown in FIG. 73, the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is provided with a special figure continuous clear counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Further, a counter temporary storage area 203p is provided instead of the counter buffer 203y provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment.

The special figure continuous clear counter 203n is the number of consecutive times that various register values are collectively acquired based on the passage of the through gate 67 (that is, the special symbol lottery is not executed, and the ordinary symbol lottery is continuously executed. It is a counter for counting the number of times of As described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery is configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition opportunity. Therefore, by intentionally causing the passage of the through gate 67 in which the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easy to be established, the first win used in the jackpot lottery among the acquired random value (register value). There is a possibility that fraudulent analysis of the value of the random number register R1 will be performed from the outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, due to the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900, the timing until the register value corresponding to the jackpot is analyzed, and the jackpot may be fraudulently assigned. .. In order to prevent this fraudulent act, in the present embodiment, the number of consecutive spheres passing through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n, and when the count value is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the fraudulent action is taken. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of an action and set an error display. As a result, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the big hit is acquired, and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the big hit.

The initial value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is set to 0, and among the counter values (register values) stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75), Each time the value of the second random number register R4 is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b, the value is incremented by 1 (see S664 of FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), various counter values (register values) used for lottery of special symbols are initialized to 0 every time they are stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (FIG. 74). (See S463).

The counter temporary storage area 203p is a storage area for temporarily storing the register value (random number value) acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 as described above. Various register values (random number values) stored in this counter temporary storage area 203p are corresponding storage areas (either the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b) corresponding to the trigger for acquiring the value. ) Is transferred to.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. First, with reference to FIG. 74, a start winning process 4 (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 4 in the fourth embodiment. The start winning process 4 (S105) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

Of the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the respective processes of S401 to S405 are the same as the respective processes of S401 to S405 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, after performing the process of S401, the values of the first win type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second random number register R4 are specially displayed. It is acquired from the random number generation IC 900 for general use and the random number generation IC 901 for universal figure, respectively, and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S461).

Further, in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the present embodiment, when the process of S405 ends, the first random number register R1 and the first type register R2 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S461. , Each value of the stop type selection register R3 is transferred to the empty area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S462). Next, after the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S463), the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S464), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the through gate passage process 4 (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the through gate passage process 4 in the fourth embodiment. This through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) instead of the through gate passage process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment.

In this through gate passage processing 4 (S107), in each processing of S601 to S604, the same processing as each processing of S601 to S604 of the through gate passage processing (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), the first per random number register R1 , The first hit type register R2, the stop type selection register R3, and the second hit random number register R4 are respectively acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Yes (S661).

Further, in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) in the present embodiment, when the process of S604 ends, the second per-random number register R4 among the various register values stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p in the process of S661. The value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S662). Then, each register value stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S663), and 1 is added to the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n (S664).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665). If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is not equal to or greater than 10 (S665: No), the present process is terminated. If the value of the special figure continuous clear counter 203n is 10 or more (S665: Yes), an error command is set (S666), and this processing ends.

In this way, by being configured to notify an error when the lottery for normal symbols is continuously executed 10 times or more, among the register values that are collectively acquired upon the passage of the through gate 67. , It is possible to prevent (suppress) an illegal act of analyzing the value of the first random number register R1. More specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, the counter value (register value) used for the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery is configured to be collectively acquired regardless of the acquisition opportunity. .. Therefore, by intentionally causing the passage of the through gate 67 in which the acquisition condition of the counter value (register value) is relatively easy to be established, the first win used in the jackpot lottery among the acquired random value (register value). There is a possibility that fraudulent analysis of the value of the random number register R1 will be performed from the outside. When this fraudulent act is executed, due to the tendency of updating the register value in the special figure random number generation IC 900, the timing until the register value corresponding to the jackpot is analyzed, and the jackpot may be fraudulently assigned. .. In order to prevent this fraudulent act, in the present embodiment, the number of consecutive spheres passing through the through gate 67 is counted by the special figure continuous clear counter 203n, and when the count value is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the fraudulent action is taken. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility of an action and set an error display. As a result, it is possible to analyze the timing at which the random number value corresponding to the big hit is acquired, and prevent (suppress) the fraudulent act of assigning the big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, all the register values (random number values) are collectively set regardless of whether the start winning is detected or the passage of the through gate 67 is detected. It is configured to be acquired and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, and transferred to a storage area (either the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a or the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b) according to the detected content. .. Regardless of the trigger for acquiring the register value (random number value), all the register values (random number values) are collectively stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. Since the process of determining whether the value (random number value) should be acquired by designating a register can be omitted, the register value (random number value) can be quickly stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p. In addition, it is possible to collectively confirm the acquisition operation of the register value (random number value) during debugging (operation verification) in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the switch reading process (S101 of FIG. 19) executed at a specific trigger of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), the starting winning of the game ball and the passage through the through gate 67 are performed. It is detecting. Then, when the start winning is detected, the register value of each random number generation IC (special figure random number generation IC 900 and general figure random number generation IC 901) is acquired in the start winning process 4 (see FIG. 74), and the through gate 67 is obtained. When it is detected that the random number is generated, the register value of each random number generation IC is acquired in the through gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75). Here, as for each register value in each random number generation IC, a random number value stored at a frequency of twice every 10 μs (a cycle of 200 kHz) is updated. This update interval (time) is set in the through-gate passage process 4 (see FIG. 75) after the register value (random number value) of each random number generation IC is acquired in the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74). This is shorter than the processing time until the register value (random number value) of is acquired. As a result, in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), even when the start winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the register values (based on the starting winning) respectively ( The random number value) and the register value (random number value) obtained based on the passage through the through gate 67 can be made different.

In the present embodiment, the random number generation IC is used in which the random number value stored is updated twice every 10 μs (cycle of 200 kHz), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a random number generation IC that can update the random number value at the timing of acquiring the random number value from the main controller 110 may be used. That is, a random number generation IC that can generate a random number value at any timing may be used. Thereby, the frequency of updating and generating the random number value can be minimized, and the power consumption can be reduced. Further, it is of course possible to use a random number generation IC having different update timings from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901. For example, it is assumed that the special figure random number generation IC 900 is updated once every 1 μs (cycle of 1 MHz), and the general figure random number generation IC 901 is updated once every 2 μs (cycle of 500 kHz). May be

In the present embodiment, as the random number generation IC, the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 are used so that the generated random number values can be collectively obtained. However, the random number generation IC used is It is not limited to two types. The number of random number generation ICs may be more than three or may be one. For example, one type of random number generation IC is used, that is, the random number generation ICs are integrated. As a result, in the process of collectively obtaining each random number value from the random number generation IC, each random number value can be obtained by only accessing one random number generation IC, as compared with individually obtaining each random number value from a plurality of random number generation ICs. It can be acquired in a batch and the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the starting winning process 4 (see FIG. 74) and the through-gate passing process 4 (see FIG. 75), when the condition for obtaining the random number value (register value) is satisfied, the special figure random number is obtained. All the random number values (register values) generated by the generation IC 900 and the universal figure random number generation IC 901 are collectively acquired.

In addition to this, in the present modification, when the acquisition condition of the random number value is satisfied, the random number value (register value) is acquired and the random number value is stored in the same one process (winning process). Is configured. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. In addition, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( Since a random number value corresponding to each can be stored using the register value), the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 76, the timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing 5 in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. The same parts as those in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this timer interrupt process 5, similarly to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 19), first, the switch reading process of S101 is executed, and then the winning process is executed (SS161). Next, the special symbol fluctuation process is executed (S104), the normal symbol fluctuation process is executed (S106), the firing control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed. (S109), the timer interrupt processing 5 ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a winning process (161) which is one of the processes of the timer interrupt process 5 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S161) in the modification of the fourth embodiment.

This winning process (S161) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 76), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or a passage through the through gate 67. However, when a prize is won or passed, various random number values are collectively obtained from each random number generation IC (special figure random number generation IC 900 and general figure random number generation IC 901), and the first winning is performed using the various random number values. This is a process for executing a process corresponding to winning (starting winning) to the ball opening 64 and passing to the through gate 67. By this winning process (S161), in the same timer interrupt process (see FIG. 76), when the starting winning of the game ball and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected, the starting winning and the passage of the through gate 67 are detected. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where each register value (random number value) is obtained from each random number generation IC based on each.

When the winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process 5.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 or passed through the through gate 67 (S4501: Yes), the first random number register R1, the first hit type register R2, and the stop type selection register R3. , Each value of the second random number register R4 is acquired from the special figure random number generation IC 900 and the general figure random number generation IC 901 and stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p provided in the RAM 203 (S4502). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance (S4503). If the ball has not won the first entrance (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4508 is not executed, and the processing proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening (S4503: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4504). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S4505).

Then, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S4503: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S4505: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S4506). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S4507), and in the processing of S4501, the first per random number register R1 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p, the first Each type register R2, each value of the stop type register R3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S4508), and in S4509. Move to processing. In the process of S4508, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S4509, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over the three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S4510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S4511).

Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S4509: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S4511). : No), and proceeds to the processing of S4514. On the other hand, the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S4509: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S4511: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S4512). Then, in the process of S4502, the value of the second random number register R4 stored in the counter temporary storage area 203p is set to the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. In the process of S4513, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S4514, the value of the counter temporary storage area 203p is cleared (S4514), and then this processing ends.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when the random number acquisition condition is satisfied, the random number value (register value) is acquired and the random number value is acquired in the same process (winning process) of 1. It is configured to perform a store and a store. As a result, when the designer performs debugging or the like, it is sufficient to confirm only one process (winning process), so that the burden on the designer at the time of development can be reduced. In addition, in the switch reading process (S101), when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67, the random number value obtained in the process 1 (winning process) ( Since a random number value corresponding to each can be stored using the register value), the processing load can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. In the above-described first embodiment, when selecting the notice effect from the notice effect selection table 222b, "reselection" is selected at a predetermined ratio (6/256).

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, “reselection” can be determined when determining the mode of the variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 222a. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which “reselection” is determined differs depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a miss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, it is configured to execute effects of different modes depending on the number of times that "reselection" is continuously determined. As a result, it is possible to predict whether the jackpot is a big hit or the player is out of the game depending on the presentation mode at the time of super reach, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the presentation. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration. The configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 78(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the ROM 222 of the present embodiment is provided with a pseudo variation complementary effect selection table 222d in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment. This pseudo-variation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines a pseudo-variation display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the variation pattern command notifies the super reach of the variation time of 60 seconds. Is. Further, the notice effect selection table 222b provided in the ROM 222 in the first embodiment is abolished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the RAM 223 of this embodiment, a variation reselection flag 223m and a variation reselection counter 223n are added to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment, and the advance notice reselection flag is added. 223e and the advance notice reselection counter 223f are deleted.

The variable reselection flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not "reselection" is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3. If the variable reselection flag 223m is on, it means that "reselection" has been determined (the type (mode) of superreach has not been determined) from the super reach selection table 222a3, and if it is off, It means that “reselection” has not been determined (the type (mode) of super reach has been determined). This fluctuation reselection flag 223m has an initial value set to OFF, and “reselection” is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3 in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 83) for selecting the type of super reach. If it is done, it is set to ON (see S5007 in FIG. 83). Then, in the variable reselection process (see FIG. 84), when any one of the types of super reach (super reach types A to C) is determined, it is set to OFF (see S5110 in FIG. 84). By referring to the variation reselection flag 223m, when "reselection" is determined from the super reach effect selection table 222a3, reselection (reselection of the super reach type in the variation reselection process (see FIG. 84) is performed. Lottery) can be performed.

The fluctuation reselection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times the process of reselecting the type of fluctuation effect (re-lottery) is continued. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times that “reselection” is determined from the super reach selection table 222a3 from the time when the variation pattern command is received until the type of the variation pattern is determined. As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that different variation patterns are set according to the number of times "reselection" is determined. The number of times "reselection" is determined is determined by the value of the variable reselection counter 223n (see S5106 in FIG. 84). The fluctuation reselection counter 223n is incremented by 1 each time the fluctuation reselection process is executed (see S5103 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when one of the variation pattern modes is selected in the variation reselection process, it is initialized to 0 (see S5109 in FIG. 84).

Next, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) to 79(d). First, FIG. 79A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79(a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present embodiment displays the variation pattern display mode when the variation pattern command notified from the main control device 110 is a command indicating complete deviation. The normal variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting, the normal reach selection table 222a2 for selecting the display mode of the variation pattern when the normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command. In this case, the super reach selection table 222a3 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern and the special reach selection table 222a4 for selecting the display mode of the fluctuation pattern when the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is configured.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79(b) to (d), the details of the super reach selection table 222a3 among the data tables forming the variation pattern selection table 222a will be described. As shown in FIG. 79(b), as the super-reach selection table 222a3, the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a referred to when the winning super-reach is notified, and the off-reach super-reach is referred to. It is composed of a detachment super-reach selection table 222a3b. In each table, variation pattern types (super reach types A to C) are defined in association with the values of the random numbers for presentation.

As shown in FIG. 79C, in the jackpot super-reach selection table 222a3a, the super-reach type A is associated with the range of the production random number value of "0-60", and the range of "61-120". Is associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “121 to 180”. Further, "reselection" is associated with the remaining range of "181 to 255". If it is configured to distribute any of the super reach types to the entire range of the random number values for production "0 to 255", the ratio of each super reach type may be set to, for example, 3 due to the restriction of the number of random number values for production. It cannot be evenly distributed (set to 1:1:1) for each type. That is, the ratio of each super reach type cannot be freely set.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting 60 random number values for determining each of the super reach types A to C, and allocating the remaining random number values to “reselection”, each of the super reach types A to C is set. Can be equalized (the selection ratio of super reach types A to C is 1:1:1).

The selection ratio of each super reach type is not limited to 1:1:1. An arbitrary selection ratio can be obtained by determining a predetermined radix and allocating a multiple of the random number for effect to each super reach type. For example, it is assumed that 30 is set as the predetermined radix and the super-reach type A: super-reach type B: super-reach type C=1:2:4 is set as the selection ratio. In this case, 30 (30×1) effect random numbers are assigned to the super reach type A, and 60 (30×2) effect random numbers are assigned to the super reach type B, and For the reach type C, 120 (30×4) random numbers for presentation may be assigned. Further, the remaining 46 random number values for presentation (256-30-60-120) may be assigned to "reselection". With this configuration, it is possible to realize the selection ratio (that is, 1:2:4) as set without generating a fraction.

As shown in FIG. 79D, in the out-reach super-reach selection table 222a3b, the super-reach type A is associated with the effect random number range of "0-80", and the range of "81-160". Is associated with the super reach type B, and the super reach type C is associated with the range of “161 to 240”. Further, "reselection" is associated with the remaining range of "241 to 255". That is, 80 random numbers for production are assigned to each super reach type. Thereby, similarly to the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, the selection ratio of each super reach type can be strictly set to 1:1:1.

The off-reach super-reach selection table 222a3b is configured so that the probability that “reselection” is determined is lower (at the time of jackpot: 76/256, at the time of loss: 16/256). Although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit as “reselection” is continuously determined. Therefore, if "reselection" is easily selected despite being off, the player is likely to be dissatisfied with the situation that the disconnection is finally notified despite the performance with high expectations is executed. There is a risk of making you hug. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability that “reselection” is determined in the case of a loss is made lower than that in the case of a big hit, and the player may have an excessive sense of expectation in the case of a loss. Is configured to prevent (suppress). As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80(a) to 80(c), the details of the pseudo-variation complementary effect selection table 222d described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 80(a), the pseudo-variation complementary effect selection table 222d is composed of at least a jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 and a deviation complementary effect selection table 222d2. The pseudo variation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for determining the display mode of 15 to 40 seconds after the start of variation of the variation pattern corresponding to super reach.

In the present embodiment, when "reselection" is decided when selecting the mode of the variation effect for 60 seconds corresponding to the super reach, the pseudo variation effect for 15 seconds (after the symbol is variably displayed, "3 ], “4”, and “1” are added to the main symbol combinations (so-called chances) to set the display effect). The pseudo variation complementary effect selection table 222d is a data table for selecting a display mode after the pseudo variation display for 15 seconds is completed.

The jackpot complementary effect selection table 222d1 is data that defines the number of times of pseudo fluctuation display displayed in the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the fluctuation start of the hit super reach in association with the number of times of "reselection". It's a table. As shown in FIG. 80( b ), the number of times “reselection” is continuously determined is within the range of “0 to 3” until the form of the hitting super reach is decided from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a. If so, the complementary effect A is set as the display mode at the time of super reach. In this complementary effect A, the fluctuating display (pseudo stop) is not performed even once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the fluctuation display in which the symbol showing the big hit is finally stopped and displayed is executed. It is a mode. That is, the change display is executed twice in the first 15 seconds after the start of change, and the pseudo change display in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed and the change display in which the symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed are executed twice in total. It

In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of "reselection" is "4 to 6", the complementary effect B in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. In the range where the number of determinations of “reselection” is “7 to 9”, the complementary effect C in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. In the range where the number of determinations of "reselection" is "10 or more", the complementary effect D in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed three times within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. It

As described above, the winning super-reach has a higher probability of being “reselected” when determining the type of super-reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(b), as the "reselection" is continuously determined, the number of executions of the pseudo variable display (pseudo stop) increases. Therefore, as the number of executions of the pseudo variable display (pseudo stop) increases, the expectation of the player for the jackpot can be increased, so that the execution frequency of the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) can be focused. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game becomes monotonous.

The supplementary effect selection table for disengagement 222d2 is data that defines the number of times of pseudo variation display displayed in the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of variation of disengagement super reach in association with the number of determinations of "reselection". It's a table. As shown in FIG. 80(c), the number of times "reselection" is continuously determined is within the range of "0 to 3" until the mode of the out-reach super-reach is determined from the out-reach super-reach selection table 222a3b. If there is, the pseudo-variation display (pseudo stop) is not performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the variation starts, and the variation display in which the symbol showing the big hit is finally stopped and displayed is executed. A is selected. That is, the variation display is executed twice in the first 15 seconds after the start of variation, that is, the pseudo variation display in which the chance is stopped and displayed and the variation display in which the symbol indicating the deviation is stopped are displayed. It

In addition, in the range where the number of determinations of "reselection" is "4 to 6", the complementary effect B in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed once within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. In the range where the number of determinations of "reselection" is "7 or more", the complementary effect C in which the pseudo fluctuation display (pseudo stop) is performed twice within 15 to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is selected. R. That is, in the out-reach super-reach, the total of the pseudo variable display executed within 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the pseudo variable display executed during the period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds (the number of display times of the chance ) Is configured to be a maximum of 3 times (one less than the maximum number of times of super reach). Therefore, in the super reach of 1, it is decided that the jackpot will be awarded when the chances are displayed four times, so that the player is made to pay attention to the number of times of pseudo-variable display (the number of times the chances are displayed). be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. First, with reference to FIG. 81, the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described.

In each of S1201 to S1210, S1212 and S1214 to S1218 of the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, S1201 to S1210, S1212 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S1214 to S1218 is executed. Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1210 ends, then, when “reselection” is determined in the previous selection process of the super reach mode, the effect randomization is performed. The variable reselection process for newly acquiring a numerical value and selecting the super-reach mode again is executed (S1291), and the process proceeds to S1212. Details of the fluctuation reselection process (S1291) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 84) in the present embodiment, after the command determination process (S1212) is executed, the variable display setting process 6 is executed (S1213), and the process proceeds to S1214 and thereafter. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) described above. This variable display setting process 6 (S1213) is received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. This is a process of setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command.

Of the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the fifth embodiment, in S1401 to S1405 and S1407 to S1410, S1401 to S1405 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S1407 to S1410 is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 6 (S1213) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1403 is completed, the detailed mode of the variable pattern is then determined based on the variable pattern (fluctuation time) extracted in the process of S1403. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1404 and thereafter. Details of this variation pattern selection processing (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1431) described above. By this variation pattern selection processing (S1431), the detailed display mode of the variation pattern according to the variation pattern command from main controller 110 is determined (selected). In this variation pattern selection process (S1431), first, the register value of the random number for production IC800 for acquisition is acquired as a random number value for production (S5001). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S1403 of the fluctuation display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 82) is a super reach fluctuation pattern (S5002).

In the processing of S5002, when it is determined in the processing of S5002 that the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command this time is not super reach (S5002: No), the table corresponding to the extracted variation type is stored in the variation pattern table 222a. The display mode of the variation pattern is determined (selected) based on the selected table and the random number value for presentation acquired in the process of S5001 (S5004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5002, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the super reach (S5002: Yes), the random number value for effect acquired by the process of S5001 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3, and the effect for effect is produced. The mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the random number is determined (selected) (S5003). As described above, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is a winning super reach, the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a is compared with the effect random number value. On the other hand, if the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is the out-reach super-reach, the out-reach super-reach selection table 222a3b and the random number value for effect are compared.

When the processing of S5003 is completed, it is determined whether or not the "reselection" is determined (selected) from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a or the out-of-range superreach selection table 222a3b (S5005), and "reselection" is performed. (S5005: Yes), a pseudo variation pattern (pseudo variation display for 15 seconds stopped and displayed at the chance) that is executed for 15 seconds from the start of variation is selected (S5006), and variation is performed. The reselection flag 223m is set to ON (S5007), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5005, when it is determined that it is not "reselection" that is determined (selected) from the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a or the out-of-range super reach selection table 222a3b (S5005: No). , The pseudo variation display is not executed, and the variation display for 60 seconds (long super reach) is selected (determined) as the variation variation display mode this time (S5008), and this processing is terminated. ..

As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (S1431), after the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern to be selected is changed according to whether or not “reselection” is determined when the first variation pattern mode is selected. (15-second pseudo-variable pattern mode or 60-second long superreach mode). By setting a short pseudo variation pattern for 15 seconds when “reselection” is selected, it is possible to reliably determine (select) the variation pattern mode during the 15 seconds. When "reselection" is selected, the fluctuation reselection process (S1291) that is repeated until the mode of the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 81). Therefore, even if the reselection is repeated up to 15,000 times in 15 seconds, the variation pattern can be selected. The probability that “reselection” is determined is 76/256 in the case of the jackpot super reach selection table 222a3a, and 16/256 in the case of the out-of-range super reach selection table 222a3b. Therefore, the probability of “reselection” being determined 5000 times consecutively is about 1/2.5×10 7911 even in the case of a jackpot with a high probability, which is a statistically negligibly low probability. .. Therefore, when "reselection" is determined, by setting the mode of the pseudo fluctuation pattern for 5 seconds, it is possible to secure the time for executing the process of reselecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the pseudo variation effect for 15 seconds is set to the same mode (a mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed) as the pseudo variation effect that may be executed 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of variation. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the effect in which the chance eyes are continuously displayed.

Details of the fluctuation reselection process (S1291) will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, in the variable reselection process (S1291), when "reselection" is determined in the previous process of selecting the super-reach mode, a new random number value for effect is newly acquired and the super-reach of the super-reach is again performed. This is a process for selecting a mode.

In this fluctuation reselection processing (S1291), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101), and if it is judged that it is off (S5101), the mode of the fluctuation pattern is reselected. Since this means that there is no need to do so, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is on (S5101), the fluctuation pattern is selected in the previous fluctuation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 83) or the fluctuation reselection processing (see FIG. 84). When the mode is selected, "reselection" is determined (selected), which means that the mode of the variation pattern is undecided. Therefore, first, the register value of the random number for production IC 800 is newly set as a random number for production. (S5102), and then increments the value of the variable reselection counter 223n by 1 (S5103) to update the number of times "reselection" is continuously determined (selected).

When the process of S5103 ends, then the effect random number newly obtained in the process of S5103 is compared with the super reach selection table 222a3 (see FIGS. 79(b) to (d)) to produce the effect randomization. A variation pattern corresponding to the numerical value is determined (selected) (S5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination (selection) by the process of S5104 is "reselection" (S5105), and if it is "reselection" (S5105: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the “reselection” is not determined (selected) (that is, any of the super reach types A to C is determined (selected)) (S5105: No). , The value of the fluctuation reselection counter 223n is compared with the pseudo fluctuation complementary effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 80(a) to (c)), and is executed in a period of 15 seconds to 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The mode of the effect (pseudo-variation complementary effect) in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed 0 to 3 times by the dynamic change display is selected (S5106).

When the process of S5106 ends, next, a super-reach mode for 20 seconds (a mode of short super-reach) corresponding to the selected type of pseudo-variation complementary effect is selected (S5107). In this short super reach, in the case of the out-reach, the combination of the stop symbols finally showing the stop is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the hit super reach, the stop symbol finally showing the big hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the mode of this short super reach is started from the state in which the symbols are changing. In accordance with this, in each of the pseudo variation complementary effects (complementary effects A to D), a state in which the symbols are changing is displayed at the end point of the execution period (40 seconds after the change starts). As a result, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize the switching from the pseudo-variable complementary effect to the mode of short super reach. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable in the display mode at the time of super reach, and to play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5107, a display variation pattern addition command for notifying the display control device 114 of the mode of the pseudo variation complementary effect selected in the processing of S5106 and the aspect of the short super reach selected in the processing of S5107. After setting (S5108), the fluctuation reselection counter 223n is initialized to 0 (S5109), the fluctuation reselection flag 223m is set to OFF (S5110), and this processing ends.

By this variation reselection process (S1291), it is possible to display a variation pattern in different forms depending on the number of times of "reselection", so that various production forms can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the super reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and when the mode of the variation pattern is selected in the voice lamp control device 113, The "reselection" is determined with a predetermined probability. More specifically, when the variation pattern (variation time) notified from main controller 110 is super reach (60 seconds), “reselection” is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the rate at which “reselection” is determined differs depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a miss. Then, when determining the effect mode of the super reach, it is configured to execute effects of different modes depending on the number of times that "reselection" is continuously determined. As a result, it is possible to predict whether the jackpot is a big hit or the player is out of the game depending on the presentation mode at the time of super reach, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the presentation. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when “reselection” is determined (selected) in the variation pattern selection process, a short pseudo variation pattern of 15 seconds is set. This makes it possible to reliably determine (select) the mode of the variation pattern during the 15 seconds. Further, since the effect of the same system as the pseudo-variation complementary effect set after the lapse of the period is set for the 15-second effect, the 15-second effect and the subsequent pseudo-variable complementary effect are associated with each other. It is possible to display the effect. Therefore, since the player's interest can be attracted to the contents of the effect, the player's motivation to participate can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the "reselection" is determined, the pseudo fluctuating display is executed once in the first 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuating operation. It is not limited to once, but may be performed more than once.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo variable effect (the number of times of displaying the chance eyes) is set to 4 at maximum, but the number of times of displaying can be set arbitrarily.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expectation value until a big hit condition occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. Referred to as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, and is caused by an operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, for example due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

It should be noted that each of the above-described embodiments and each control example, or a part thereof may be combined. Further, although it is configured by a plurality of control devices, it may be configured by one integrated control device or some integrated control devices.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (re-lottery so that the ratio becomes an integer)
A generation unit capable of updating and generating the judgment value within a predetermined range, an acquisition unit that acquires the judgment value generated by the generation unit, and the judgment value acquired by the acquisition unit are set in advance. A game machine having a determination means for determining whether the value matches the value and a control means for executing a process set corresponding to the set value when the determination means determines that the value matches the set value. In the case where it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, the acquisition unit acquires the determination value newly generated by the generation unit. The number set to the specific determination value having an acquisition control means for controlling the means is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value, A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer.

Here, for example, a gaming machine is known that executes various kinds of lottery, such as a lottery for winning or not based on a winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening and a lottery for a mode of display effect. In such a lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of the judgment value (for example, a random number counter) matches a predetermined setting value, and if the judgment value matches the setting value, the setting value is handled. There is one in which the processing (such as determination of the mode of effect) set by the above is executed (for example, JP-A-2002-331078). In this case, the ratio of the number of preset setting values to the number of possible judgment values (that is, the probability of various lottery results) becomes a fraction or a decimal number. ) Was usually generated. That is, the probabilities (percentages) of various lottery results could not be converted into integers. However, in the development stage of the gaming machine, it is general to design the percentage of each lottery result as a percentage (percentage). Therefore, when the designer distributes the number of set values that will be various lottery results at the development stage of the gaming machine, the probability of each lottery result designed by percentage (percentage) and each judgment value according to that percentage It may be difficult for the designer to intuitively understand the correspondence with the number. That is, the design may be inefficient.

In addition, when publishing the probability (ratio) of each lottery result, it is common to publish the numerical value converted into a percentage in many cases, but when a fraction (decimal point) occurs in the percentage, Depending on how to round down the decimal places, the total of the percentages may not be 100%, which may result in incomprehensible notation for the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation means is acquired. The acquisition control means controls the acquisition means. Here, the number set in the specific determination value is the ratio of the number set in the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

As a result, the ratio of the number set as the set value can be set to a value that is intuitively easy to understand, so that there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value more easily understood by the player. That is, there is an effect that the set value can be set appropriately.

In the gaming machine A1, the generating means updates the determination value within a shorter period than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value. A gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the determination value is updated by the generation means within a shorter period than the shortest interval at which the acquisition means acquires the determination value. Therefore, the generation means updates the determination value. It is possible to prevent the same determination value from being acquired a plurality of times by the acquisition unit before being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the discrimination result by the discriminating means from being biased.

A plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means in the gaming machine A1 or A2, and one or a plurality of set values are set in each of the control processes executable by the control means. The gaming machine A3, wherein the control means is assigned and executes the control processing corresponding to the set value determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of different control processes are set in the control process executed by the control means. One or a plurality of set values are assigned to each of the control processes that can be executed by the control means. Then, the control means executes the control process corresponding to the set value determined by the determination means.

Accordingly, different control processes can be executed according to the result of the judgment by the judging means, so that there is an effect that various kinds of control processes can be executed.

In the gaming machine A3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is the difference between the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the ratio is set to be an integer.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the number of set values assigned to each of the control processes executable by the control means is set to the number of determined values within a predetermined range and a specific determined value. Since the ratio with respect to the difference from the number of games is set to be an integer, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value more easily understood by the player.

The number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined by the determination means to match the predetermined setting value in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4 A gaming machine A5, comprising: a number counting means for counting the number of times, and a determination end means for ending the determination by the determination means when the number of consecutive times counted by the number counting means reaches a specific number.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is obtained. That is, the number of consecutive times when the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value without being determined to match the predetermined set value by the determination means is counted by the number counting means, and the number of times counting is performed. When the number of consecutive times counted by the means reaches the specific number, the discrimination by the discrimination means is terminated by the discrimination end means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the determination value is continuously determined to be the specific determination value and other control processes cannot be executed during that period.

The gaming machine A6 is provided with an execution control means for causing the control means to execute a specific control when the discrimination by the discrimination means in the gaming machine A5 is finished.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the execution control means causes the control means to execute a specific control when the determination by the determination means is completed. Even if the determination is completed without the determination value matching the set value, the control can be normally performed.

The number set to the specific determination value in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6 is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set to the specific determination value. The gaming machine A7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. Since the ratio of the number set in the set value to the number difference is set to be an integer in percentage notation, the effect that the design can be performed more efficiently in the development stage of the gaming machine There is. Further, there is an effect that the ratio of the number set in the set value can be set to a value more easily understood by the player.

The control means is provided with display means for displaying a display effect on any of the gaming machines A1 to A7 and effect executing means for executing the display effect on the display means, and the control means controls the display effect executed by the effect executing means. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that a type set corresponding to the set value is selected as a type.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A7, the following effect is obtained. That is, the display effect is executed by the effect executing means with respect to the display means for displaying the display effect. As the type of the display effect executed by the effect execution means, the type set by the control means in correspondence with the set value is selected.

As a result, there is an effect that the rate at which the display effect is selected can be set to a value that is easily understood by the player.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a plurality of control means for repeatedly executing a plurality of control processes including the determination by the determination means according to a predetermined control procedure is provided, and the acquisition control means is the determination value acquired by the acquisition means. Is determined to be the specific determination value different from the set value, the determination value newly generated by the generation means after executing another control process based on the predetermined control procedure. A gaming machine A9, characterized in that it controls the acquisition means so as to acquire.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of control processes including the discrimination by the discriminating means are repeatedly executed by the plural control means according to a predetermined control procedure. When it is determined that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit is a specific determination value different from the set value, another control process based on a predetermined control procedure is executed, and then the generation unit newly generates it. The acquisition control unit controls the acquisition unit to acquire the determined determination value.

With this, when the acquired determination value is a specific determination value, it is possible to suppress acquisition of a new determination value without executing other control processing, and thus delay other control processing. There is an effect that it can be executed normally without any.

<Feature B group> (Sub-side starts pseudo-variation based on the passage of a fixed interval)
It has a main control means for executing game control and a peripheral control means for executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the main control means has a judgment value within a predetermined range. A storage unit that stores the determination unit that acquires the determination value based on the generation unit that is updated and generated and the acquisition condition that is satisfied by the generation unit, and the determination value information that is based on the determination value that is acquired by the acquisition unit. And a number information signal generating unit for generating a number information signal indicating the number of the stored determination value information when the determination value information is stored in the storage unit and the determination value information acquired from the acquisition unit. And a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. It is advantageous for the player when the period information signal generating unit that generates the period information signal indicating the dynamic display period determined by the determining unit and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display unit. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege, the peripheral control means dynamically displays the dynamic display period indicated by the received period information signal and the identification information on a display means. And after the dynamic display of the identification information is finished, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, on the condition that the judgment value information is stored in the storage means, the effect pattern of the display means A gaming machine B1 characterized by having a production symbol dynamic display means for starting dynamic display.

Here, for example, there is a game machine in which the variation effect is started based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening. The variation effect is started immediately (for example, within 1 second) when the winning is not suspended, and when the winning is suspended, immediately after the variation effect based on the winning immediately before the suspension is finished ( It is usually started within 1 second (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-050734). In such a gaming machine, if the instruction to start the variation effect is delayed and the variation effect is not started promptly, the player will get the impression that the gaming machine is not operating normally, and There was a risk of distrust.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the peripheral display means dynamically displays the dynamic display period and the identification information indicated by the received period information signal by the dynamic display execution means. After the dynamic display of the identification information, when a predetermined period of time has passed, on the condition that the determination value information is stored in the storage means, the effect on the display means by the effect design dynamic display means The dynamic display of symbols is started.

Thereby, when the predetermined period has elapsed without receiving the period information signal, it is possible to recognize that the normal operation is performed by the dynamic display of the effect design. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period determination means corresponds to the set value when the determination means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means matches a predetermined set value. The main control means determines the dynamic display period, and when the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, the main control means newly generates the new value by the generation means. The number set to the specific determination value includes an acquisition control unit that controls the acquisition unit to acquire the determination value generated in The gaming machine B2, wherein the ratio of the number set to the set value is set to an integer with respect to the difference from the number set to the value.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determination unit determines that the determination value acquired by the acquisition unit matches the predetermined set value, the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. Here, when the main control means determines that the judgment value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific judgment value different from the set value, the main control means acquires the judgment value newly generated by the generation means. The means are controlled by the acquisition control means. Then, the number set in the specific determination value is the ratio of the number set in the set value to the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. Is set to be an integer.

As a result, since the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be an integer, the effect that the design can be performed efficiently when designing the rate of the dynamic display period at the development stage of the gaming machine There is. Further, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine B21 or B2, a plurality of the dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit, and the dynamic display period determining unit can determine the dynamic display period. One or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods, and the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the setting value determined by the determining means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Then, one or a plurality of setting values are assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period corresponding to the set value determined by the determining means.

Accordingly, different dynamic display periods can be determined according to the set value determined by the determination means, and thus the determined dynamic display period can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B3, the number of the set values assigned to each of the dynamic display periods that can be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. A gaming machine B4, wherein the ratio to the difference from the number set to is an integer.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the number of set values assigned to each dynamic display period that can be determined by the dynamic display period determining means is the number of determination values within a predetermined range. Since the ratio with respect to the difference between the number and the number set to the specific determination value is set to be an integer, the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined can be an integer. Therefore, there is an effect that the design can be efficiently performed when designing the ratio at which each dynamic display period is determined in the development stage of the gaming machine. Further, there is an effect that the rate at which each dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the peripheral control means does not receive the period information signal even after a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbols was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means. A gaming machine B5, characterized by comprising a notification mode setting means for setting a specific notification mode.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, period information even if a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display of the effect symbol was started by the effect symbol dynamic display means in the peripheral control means. When the signal is not received, the notification mode setting means sets the specific notification mode, so that the player or the clerk of the hall recognizes that the period information signal has not been received for the specific period by the specific notification mode. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine B5, the specific period is a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal, the gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the specific period is set to a period shorter than the dynamic display period indicated by the period information signal, so that a plurality of states in which the period information signal cannot be received may occur. It is possible to suppress continuation over the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that a defect of the period information signal can be notified earlier.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set in the specific determination value is the difference between the number of determination values in the predetermined range and the number set in the specific determination value. The gaming machine B7, wherein the ratio of the number set in the set value is set to be an integer in percentage notation.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the number set to the specific determination value is set to the number of the determination values in the predetermined range and the specific determination value. When designing the ratio of the dynamic display period at the development stage of the gaming machine, the ratio of the number set in the setting value is set to be an integer in percentage notation with respect to the difference with the number Moreover, there is an effect that the design can be performed more efficiently. Further, there is an effect that the rate at which the dynamic display period is determined can be set to a value that is easier for the player to understand.

In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the main control means determines by the determination means that the determination value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific determination value different from the set value, Until the determination value is determined to match any one of the set values, the acquisition control unit obtains the new determination value and the determination unit repeats the determination of the new determination value. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, when the determining means determines that the determination value acquired by the acquiring means is a specific determination value different from the set value. Since the main control unit repeats the acquisition of the new determination value by the acquisition control unit and the determination of the new determination value by the determination unit until it is determined that the determination value matches any of the set values, The dynamic display time can be reliably determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem in which the dynamic display is not executed in the peripheral control means.

<Characteristic C group> (Secured by discriminating the effect counter in advance)
Generation means capable of updating and generating a judgment value constituted by a value within a predetermined range, acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value based on satisfaction of a first condition from the generation means, and acquisition means therefor Storage means for storing the determination value acquired in the above, determination means for determining the determination value acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination value acquired by the acquisition means by the determination means is a specific determination value When it is determined that the specific determination value is not stored in the storage unit, the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to acquire the newly generated determination value, and based on the establishment of the second condition, And a control process determination unit that determines a control process to be executed based on the determination value stored in the storage unit, and the number of the specific determination values is such that the execution ratio of the control process is an integer ratio. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being set as follows.

In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined upper limit number of the determination values, and when the upper limit number is exceeded, one of the already stored determination values is overwritten and stored. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being played.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first condition is configured to be easier to be satisfied than the second condition, the gaming machine C3.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a predetermined number of the determination values are defined in advance in the determination value defining means, and the determination values defined in the determination value defining means are stored in the storage means based on the power-on. A gaming machine C4, comprising: storage control means for controlling to store the predetermined number of determination values other than the specific determination value.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machine control processing determining means determines one of the control processings from the plurality of control processings, and one or a plurality of control processings for each of the plurality of control processings. The number of the determination value assigned to each of the plurality of control processing, the determination value is assigned, the number of the determination value and a value within the predetermined range and the specific determination value The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the ratio with respect to the difference from the number is set to be an integer.

The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the generating means updates the determination value in a shorter period than the shortest interval in which the acquisition means acquires the determination value.

<Characteristic D group> (Pseudo ream if replay is subtracted)
Before the ball is entered by the ball entry information acquisition means and the ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball entry information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means and the ball entry into the ball entry means When the discriminating means for discriminating based on the filled-in ball information and the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means are displayed, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. In addition, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player, a generating means capable of updating and generating a judgment value within a predetermined range in the possessed gaming machine, and the judgment generated by the generating means. An acquisition means for acquiring a value, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are acquired by the acquisition means. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display mode determination means that determines based on the determination value and the determination result When the determination value is a specific determination value, when determining the dynamic display mode of 1 and the acquisition control unit that causes the acquisition unit to newly acquire the determination value newly generated by the generation unit, When the determination value is acquired by the acquisition unit, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed at least once during the execution of the dynamic display mode determined based on the newly acquired determination value. And a temporary stop display means for causing the gaming machine D1.

In the gaming machine D1, the temporary stop display means determines the number of times of the temporary stop based on the number of times the specific determination value is acquired when the dynamic display mode of 1 is determined. A gaming machine D2 characterized by the above.

The gaming machine D3, wherein the specific determination value in the gaming machine D1 or D2 is set to a large value when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained.

The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3 is the specific determination result and the specific dynamic display mode determined when the determination is made by the determination means. And, at least a plurality of normal dynamic display modes that are determined when the result is other than the specific determination result, and the determination value for the specific dynamic display mode and the normal dynamic display mode, respectively. Is allocated and set in advance, the gaming machine D4.

In the gaming machine D4, the number of the specific determination values is set such that the ratio of determining the specific dynamic display mode or the normal dynamic display mode is an integer. Gaming machine D5.

<Feature E group> (Random number acquisition is shared)
When the first condition is satisfied with the first generation unit that updates and generates the first determination value with a value within the first range, the first determination value acquired from the first generation unit is the specific first determination value. Within the second range, there is provided a first discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it is one judgment value and a first control means for executing the first control when the first discriminating means judges that the particular first judgment value is obtained. When the second condition different from the first condition and the second generating unit that updates and generates the second determination value with the value of is satisfied, the second determination value acquired by the second generating unit is specified. Second determining means for determining whether the second determination value is the second determination value, and when the second determining means determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, the second control different from the first control is executed. Based on whether one of the first control means and the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the first determination value and the second determination value are respectively determined by the first generation means and the second generation means. 2. The game machine E1 comprising: an acquisition unit that acquires 2 determination values.

Here, for example, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, there is a special symbol lottery, there is a gaming machine that performs the regular symbol lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate. In such a gaming machine, the special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery is obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and the normal symbol is determined based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate. There is one that acquires a judgment value for ordinary symbols for performing a lottery. (For example, JP2012-010910A). In this case, the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball wins the starting opening or when the game ball passes through the through gate, which causes a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the first determination value is updated and generated by the first generation means with a value within the first range. When the first condition is satisfied, the first determination unit determines whether the first determination value acquired from the first generation unit is the specific first determination value, and the specific first determination is performed by the first determination unit. When it is determined that the value is the value, the first control means executes the first control. The second determination value is updated and generated by the second generation means with a value within the second range. When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second determining unit determines whether the second determination value acquired by the second generating unit is the specific second determination value. When the second determination unit determines that the second determination value is the specific second determination value, the second control unit executes the second control different from the first control. Based on the fact that either one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the first determination value and the second determination value are acquired by the acquisition unit from the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively.

With this, the operation of the acquisition unit can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the control process can be prevented from becoming complicated. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

An amusement machine E2, comprising: a storage means for storing the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means in the gaming machine E1 until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition means are stored in the storage means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The determination by the means and the determination by the second determination means can be executed based on each determination value stored in the storage means. That is, since it is not necessary to immediately determine using the determination values acquired by the acquisition means, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the processing order and the like in the control processing.

In the gaming machine E2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination of the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. Gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination of the first determination unit or the second determination unit corresponding to the established first condition or the second condition is performed, and thus the predetermined condition is acquired by the acquisition unit. It is possible to prevent the first determination value or the second determination value from being discarded before being used for the determination. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination from being performed based on the abnormal determination value.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first control is a control for giving a first advantage advantageous to the player, and the second control is a second advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage. 2 A gaming machine E4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, the control for giving the first benefit that is advantageous to the player is performed by the first control, and the control for giving the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit is performed by the second control. Done.

This allows the player to play the game in the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is provided a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter and a passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the first condition is based on that the game ball passes through the passing means. The game machine E5 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied based on that a game ball enters the ball entering means.

The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4. That is, the first condition is established based on the game ball passing through the passage means through which the game ball can pass, and the second condition is based on the game ball entering the ball entering means through which the game ball can enter. Is established.

As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize the trigger for the first condition and the second condition to be established. Therefore, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control every time the first condition or the second condition is recognized, so that the player's game There is an effect that it can improve the interest in

Of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a first detection means for detecting the establishment of the first condition, a second detection means for detecting the establishment of the second condition, the first detection means, and the second detection means. Based on the detection result, a predetermined condition determining means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined control for executing the control according to the satisfied predetermined condition is performed. A game execution machine E6, comprising: a control execution means.

The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the establishment of the first condition is detected by the first detection means, and the establishment of the second condition is detected by the second detection means. Based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, the predetermined condition determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The control according to the predetermined condition is executed by the predetermined control execution means.

As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, according to the control content of the predetermined control execution means.

In the gaming machine E6, the counting means counts the number of times that the first detecting means detects the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second detecting means detects the satisfaction of the second condition. And an initialization unit for initializing the result, wherein the predetermined condition determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the counting result by the counting unit is a predetermined number of times or more. Gaming machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6. That is, the number of times the first detecting means detects that the first condition is satisfied is counted by the counting means. Then, the counting result of the counting means is initialized by the initialization means based on the detection of the establishment of the second condition by the second detection means. When the counting result by the counting means is a predetermined number of times or more, the predetermined condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine whether the first condition is continuously detected a predetermined number of times or more without the second condition being satisfied, according to the control content of the predetermined control execution means.

Based on the first judgment value and the second judgment value acquired by the acquisition means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the third generation means and the third generation means generate the third judgment value. Storage control means for storing the generated third judgment value in the storage means until the judgment of the first judgment means or the second judgment means corresponding to the established first condition or second condition is executed. And a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means. An amusement machine E8, comprising: a specific control executing means for executing control based on the established specific condition when it is determined that the specific condition is established.

The gaming machine E8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7. That is, the third determination value is generated by the third generation unit based on the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the acquisition unit, and the third determination value generated by the third generation unit is It is stored in the storage means by the storage control means until the discrimination by the first discrimination means or the second discrimination means corresponding to the established first condition or the second condition is executed. Based on the first determination value, the second determination value, and the third determination value stored in the storage means, the specific condition determination means determines whether the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. When it is determined, the control based on the established specific condition is output by the specific control executing means.

As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific condition is satisfied according to the content of the control executed by the specific control execution means.

In the gaming machine E8, the specific condition determination means is newly generated by the third generation means based on the third determination value stored in the storage means and the first determination value and the second determination value. A gaming machine E9, which determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the third determination value is different.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E8, the third generating means is newly generated based on the third determination value stored in the storage means, and the first determination value and the second determination value. If the third determination value is different from the third determination value, the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the first generation means and the second generation means are generated according to the content of the control executed by the specific control means. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not each determination value is normally updated by the means.

Predetermined determination means for performing predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage means when any of the gaming machines E1 to E9 satisfies the first condition, and the determination result of the predetermined determination means A gaming machine E10 comprising: a notifying means for making a notification based on the above.

The gaming machine E10 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E9. That is, when the first condition is satisfied, the predetermined determination unit makes a predetermined determination based on the second determination value stored in the storage unit. Then, based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means, the notification means gives notification.

As a result, the player can easily know the determination result of the predetermined determination according to the content of the notification by the notification means.

The gaming machine E10 includes display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the second condition. The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the notifying means displays an effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determining means while the dynamic display is being performed by the dynamic display means.

The gaming machine E11 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E10. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means capable of displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means based on the establishment of the second condition. Then, during the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, the notification means displays the effect based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the display mode during the execution of the dynamic display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic F group> (Batch acquisition is possible twice within one interrupt process)
The first control means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range, the second generation means for updating and generating the second determination value with a value within the second range, and the game control processing are repeated. In a gaming machine having executable control means and interrupt means capable of executing interrupt processing by interrupting control processing of the game based on a predetermined trigger, the first condition is satisfied in the interrupt means. Based on the above, as one process of the interrupt process, a first acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value from the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, and A second condition different from the first control unit that executes the first control when the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is determined to be the specific first determination value, and the first condition. Based on the fact that the above condition is satisfied, the first generation unit and the second generation unit each newly update the first generation unit and the second generation unit as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition unit. The second acquisition unit that acquires a determination value and the second determination value, and the first determination unit when the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is the specific second determination value A game machine F1 comprising: a second control means for executing a second control different from the control.

Here, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery for a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and performs a lottery for a normal symbol based on a game ball passing through a through gate. In such a gaming machine, the special symbol determination value for performing a special symbol lottery is obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, and the normal symbol is determined based on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate. There is one that acquires a judgment value for ordinary symbols for performing a lottery. (For example, JP2012-010910A). In this case, the control process needs to be different depending on whether the game ball wins the starting opening or when the game ball passes through the through gate, which causes a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the interrupt means, as a process of the interrupt process, the first determination means and the second generation means respectively provide the first determination value and the first determination value. The second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition means. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is the specific first determination value, the first control unit executes the first control. Further, based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as a process of the interrupt process that is acquired after the first acquisition unit, the first generation unit and the second generation unit are respectively updated. The first determination value and the second determination value updated to are acquired by the second acquisition means. When it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is the specific second determination value, the second control unit executes the second control different from the first control.

As a result, the second acquisition unit acquires the newly updated first determination value and the second determination value, and therefore an independent determination different from the first determination value and the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit. You can get the value. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to ensure fairness when the second control unit determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value. That is, there is an effect that suitable control processing can be executed.

In the gaming machine F1, the second generation means updates and generates the second determination value at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means. Gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means, the second generation means updates and generates the second determination value. Therefore, the second determination value acquired based on the establishment of the second condition is the determination value newly updated and generated after the second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition means. Therefore, even when the first determination unit and the second determination unit respectively acquire the first determination value and the second determination value in one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit. The value is an independent judgment value different from the second judgment value acquired by the first acquisition means. As a result, it is possible to ensure fairness when the second control unit determines whether the second determination value is the specific second determination value.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the interrupt means uses the first acquisition means and the second acquisition means when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one of the interrupt processes. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that acquisition and execution are executed in the one interrupt processing.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, the interrupting means causes the first acquiring means to acquire Since the acquisition by the second acquisition means is executed in one interrupt process, it is possible to determine whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process, and the one interrupt process is performed. In the process, the first judgment value and the second judgment value can be acquired respectively based on the establishment of the first condition and the second condition, so that the acquisition of the first judgment value and the second judgment value can be performed efficiently. There is an effect that can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first control is a control for giving a first advantage that is advantageous to the player, and the second control is a second advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage. 2 A gaming machine F4, which is a control for giving a privilege.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, the first control provides the player with the advantageous first privilege. In addition, the second control provides the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit.

This allows the player to play the game in the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, there is provided a ball entering means into which the game ball can enter and a passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the first condition is based on that the game ball passes through the passing means. The game machine F5, wherein the second condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first condition is satisfied on the basis of the game ball passing through the passing means. Further, the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.

As a result, the player can be made aware of the trigger for the first condition and the second condition to be established. Therefore, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control each time the first condition or the second condition is recognized, so that the player's game There is an effect that it can improve the interest in

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, and F1 to F5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E11, F1 to F5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, a special symbol hit lottery is performed, and a game machine that performs a normal symbol hit lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate is there. In such a gaming machine, a determination value for performing a special lottery lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is obtained, and a normal lottery lottery is performed based on the game ball passing through the through gate. There is a method for acquiring a determination value for (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-010910).
However, in such a gaming machine, the control process may be complicated.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing suitable control processing.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a first generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range, and a second determination value with a value within the second range. Second generation means for updating and generating, a control means capable of repeatedly executing game control processing, and an interrupt processing capable of interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined trigger to execute the interrupt processing. Interrupting means, and the interrupting means includes one of the first generating means and the second generating means as one process of the interrupting process based on the satisfaction of the first condition. When it is determined that a first acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value and the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit are the specific first determination values. As a process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition unit, based on the first control unit executing the first control and the second condition different from the first condition being satisfied. , A second acquisition unit that acquires the first determination value and the second determination value that are newly updated by the first generation unit and the second generation unit, respectively, and the second acquisition unit acquires the second determination value. A second control unit that executes a second control different from the first control when the second determination value is determined to be the specific second determination value.
The game machine according to the technical idea 2 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the second generation means is the second determination at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means. The value is updated and generated.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the interrupting means satisfies one of the first condition and the second condition in one of the interrupting processes. In addition, the acquisition by the first acquisition unit and the acquisition by the second acquisition unit are executed in the one interrupt process.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first control is a control for giving an advantageous first privilege to the player. The 2nd control is a control for giving a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, further comprising a ball-entering means through which a game ball can enter and a passing means through which the game ball can pass. The first condition is satisfied based on the game ball passing through the passing means, and the second condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first means and the second generating means respectively make the first processing as one processing of the interrupt processing based on the first condition being satisfied in the interrupt means. The determination value and the second determination value are acquired by the first acquisition means. Then, when it is determined that the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is the specific first determination value, the first control unit executes the first control. Further, based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, as a process of the interrupt process that is acquired after the first acquisition unit, the first generation unit and the second generation unit are respectively updated. The first determination value and the second determination value updated to are acquired by the second acquisition means. When it is determined that the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is the specific second determination value, the second control unit executes the second control different from the first control.
Thereby, there is an effect that a suitable control process can be executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, at least between the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means, the second generation means Since the second determination value is updated and generated, the second determination value acquired based on the satisfaction of the second condition is newly updated and generated after the second determination value is acquired by the first acquisition unit. It becomes the judged value. Therefore, even when the first determination unit and the second determination unit respectively acquire the first determination value and the second determination value in one interrupt process, the second determination acquired by the second acquisition unit. The value is an independent judgment value different from the second judgment value acquired by the first acquisition means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be more fairly determined whether or not it is the specific second determination value.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the predetermined condition is that the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process. In this case, since the interruption means executes the acquisition by the first acquisition means and the acquisition by the second acquisition means in one interrupt process, the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in one interrupt process. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the first determination value and the second determination value are respectively acquired based on the satisfaction of the first condition and the second condition in the one interrupt process, There is an effect that the first determination value and the second determination value can be efficiently obtained.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first control provides the player with the advantageous first privilege. In addition, the second control provides the second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit.
This allows the player to play the game in the expectation that the first control or the second control will be executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is satisfied on the basis of the game ball passing through the passing means. Further, the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entering means.
As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize the trigger for the first condition and the second condition to be established. Therefore, the player can be expected to execute the first control or the second control each time the first condition or the second condition is recognized, so that the player's game There is an effect that it can improve the interest in

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
110 Main control means (control means, interrupt means)
900 Special figure random number generation IC (first generation means)
901 Universal figure random number generation IC (second generation means)
S215 Part of second control means S461 Second acquisition means S516, S517, S525 First control means S661 First acquisition means S1006 Part of second control means

Claims (2)

First generation means for updating and generating the first determination value with a value within the first range;
Second generating means for updating and generating the second determination value with a value within the second range;
Control means capable of repeatedly executing game control processing,
On a gaming machine having an interrupt means capable of interrupting the game control processing based on a predetermined trigger and executing the interrupt processing,
The interrupt means,
Based on the satisfaction of the first condition, as a processing of the interrupt processing, the first determination value and the second determination value are respectively acquired from the first generation means and the second generation means. 1 acquisition means,
A first control unit that executes a first control when the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is determined to be the specific first determination value;
Based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the first generation unit and the second generation unit are set as one process of the interrupt process executed after the first acquisition unit. Second acquisition means for acquiring respectively the first determination value and the second determination value that are newly updated,
Second control means for executing a second control different from the first control when the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition means is determined to be the specific second determination value. Prepare ,
After the first determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit, a process of deleting the second determination value acquired by the first acquisition unit is performed,
After the second determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit, a process of deleting the first determination value acquired by the second acquisition unit is performed. A gaming machine characterized by. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the storage means is configured to store the first determination value and the second determination value up to a predetermined upper limit number.

Images